Schedule A1 - City of Vancouver

Appendix 3Schedule A1

Supply and Delivery of Fire Apparatus1875 IPGM High Pressure Two Stage Engine Units

PS05032

Proponents- do not write in this section 2.0 Detailed Equipment Specifications and Compliance Matrix2.1.1 CAB & COMPONENTS

1875 IGPM High Pressure Two-Stage Engines

2.1.1 Cab

a) The cab shall be aluminum bodied, medium four door, with a 10” raised roof, a flat floor, fully enclosed tilt cab with an open interior and seating for five (5) fire fighters.

b) The cab shall be specifically designed for the fire fighting service. c) The cab roof to be covered with aluminum checker plate. d) The cab construction shall have extruded box sections that provide maximum strength for safety.

e) The rear cab wall shall be .090" thick aluminum and the cab front skin and floor shall be .190" thick aluminum.

f) The cab design shall be tested to the standard ECE regulation – 29 test. g) Low profile cabs will not be accepted.

2.1.2 Cab Fascia

a) The front cab fascia shall act as a fascia only, with provisions for four (Hi/Low Beam) headlamps, turn signal lamps and four warning lamps.b) The front fascia shall allow access to check and fill the engine oil, power steering fluid and wiper washer fluid and provide access for servicing the windshield wiper motor and linkage, ember separator, electrical bulkhead connectors, transmission ECU and the multiplex V-Mux control. c) All engine fluid levels must be easily checked and filled without raising cab.

2.1.3 Car Doors

a) The cab doors shall have flush, hidden, door hinges.

b) All doors shall be equipped with push button type with exterior latch locks that are designed to prevent accidental lockouts. c) All cab door locks shall be keyed a like. d) The interior door latches shall be flush, paddle type, which are incorporated into an upper door panel.e) The inner door panels shall be a black ABS formed upper and aluminum lower.f) The lower cab door panels shall have 60 % of the surface covered with NFPA compliant reflective material and have a flashing warning LED light installed in each door panel.

2.1.4 Steps

Proponent to indicate whether they meet or exceed specification. Explain in detail.

VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

Page 1 of 64



PS05032

Proponents- do not write in this section


VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

a) At each front door there shall be shall be at least two (2) steps, with the lower step constructed of stainless steel open grate material and the intermediate step covered with embossed, NFPA compliant, aluminum tread plate.

b) At each rear door there shall be a two (2) step configuration with the lower step constructed of stainless steel open grate material and the intermediate step covered with embossed, NFPA compliant, aluminum tread plate.

2.1.5 Trim Band

a) A 10” high stainless steel trim band with upper and lower trim affixed without holes and fasteners, shall be installed full width on the front, on the lower exterior sides of the cab and doors, equal in height of the front bumper.

2.1.6 Outer Assist Bars

a) Four (4) 18” three piece assist handles shall be installed, one (1) behind each cab door.

2.1.7 Bumper and Apron Cover

a) A one (1) piece, polished stainless steel front bumper shall be provided. b) The bumper shall be a 12” high, two (2) rib, wrap-around style extended 21” ahead of the cab.c) A 3/16” bright aluminum tread plate apron with a 15” wide, full length hose well shall be installed between the bumper and the face of the cab, capable of holding 150 feet of 1 ½” double jacket hose.d) There shall be a hinged aluminum cover with flush latch and gas cylinder installed over the hose well.

2.1.8 Electric Horns, Air Horns and Actuators

a) Dual electric horns and Grover Stuttertone 24” air horns shall be supplied, recessed in the front bumper. b) 3/8” air supply lines, set equal distance from each horn shall be installed. c) The electric and or air horn actuation shall be accomplished by using the existing driver’s steering wheel contacts or a sealed push button switch on the pump panel or right side officer’s push button switch.

2.1.9 Fog Lights

a) Two (2) clear rectangular fog/driving lamps shall be installed in the front bumper.

2.1.10 Backup Alarm and Disable Switch

a) An ECCO #575 backup alarm shall be installed at the rear of the chassis with an output level of not less than 107 dB.

Page 2 of 64



PS05032



VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

b) The alarm will automatically activate when the transmission is placed in reverse. c) An audible alarm shall be wired to the open door light, which will sound when a door is open, and the air brake is off with the vehicle in gear. d) There shall be a back-up alarm disable switch installed in the cab dash within reach of the driver. e) The backup alarm, disconnect switch will automatically reset to sound the next time the transmission is placed in reverse

2.1.11 Tow Eyes

a) Two chrome plated tow eyes shall be installed below the bumper. b) The eyes shall be fabricated from ¾” thick hot rolled steel.c) The inside diameter of the eye shall be 2.00” and have a chamfered edge.

2.1.12 Exterior Lights

a) All vehicle lighting to meet the latest BC Motor Vehicle Act and Canadian Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Act requirements, the requirements of NFPA 1901 – 2003 edition and the ULC standards at time of delivery.

2.1.13 Headlights

a) Four (4) rectangular halogen headlamps with separate high and low beams in bright bezels shall be provided. b) The headlamps shall be equipped with a “Daytime Running” light feature, which will illuminate the headlights to 80% brilliance when the ignition switch is in the “On” position and the parking brake is released.

2.1.14 Cab Lights

a) Five (5) Approved Light Emitting Diode (LED) cab marker lamps shall be installed on the Top front face of the cab above the windshield.

2.1.15 Turn Signals

a) Whelen model 60A00TAR amber LED programmable turn signals shall be mounted in polished cast 6EFLANGE above the warning lamps.

2.1.16 Cornering Lights

a) Two (2) Whelen 400J000CR steady on cornering lamps with clear lenses, mounted in 4EFLANGEs shall be provided above the lower zone A red lights on the corners of the bumper.

2.1.17 Scene Lights

Page 3 of 64



PS05032



VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

a) There shall be two Whelen 810 series clear lights installed on the cab, mounted in 5EFLANGEs. b) Two (2) lights shall be located on each side upper cab and each controlled by separate switches. c) There shall be four (4) 27 degree, Whelen 70J000CR Optiscene lights installed on the main body, mounted in 7EFLANGEs. d) Two (2) lights shall be located on each side upper body.e) These scene lights shall become illuminated after the parking brake is engaged and on the side that a cab door is opened or all lights after a switch on the main dash panel is turned on.

2.1.18 Pump Compartment Lights

a) There shall be four (4) light(s) installed in the pump compartment. b) An automatic switch shall activate the lights.

2.1.19 Midship Turn Signals

a) There shall be two (2) Whelen model 70A000TAR LED turn signal lights, in 7EFLANGEs installed in the rear wheel well area, one on each side of the body.

2.1.20 Walkway Lights

a) Weldon model 9185-40003 lights shall be mounted in a manner that illuminates all walkways and steps for safe operation of the apparatus. b) These lights shall become illuminated when the parking brake is engaged and after a dedicated switch on the main dash panel is turned on. 2.1.21 Tail, Turn Signal and Brake Lights

a) There shall be two (2) Whelen 600 series LED tail light assemblies installed on the rear of the apparatus. b) Two (2) red 60J000R LED taillights, two (2) amber 60TAR LED turn lights, and two (2) red 60R00XRR LED brake lights shall be supplied. c) The lights shall be mounted in cast 3 housing, one on each side of the apparatus.

2.1.22 Rear LED Clearance Lights

a) Three (3) PAR 16 – T0R00FRR LED clearance lights shall be installed on the rear of the body.

2.1.23 Traffic Advisor

a) There shall be one (1) Whelen model TAM870 “LED” Traffic Advisor installed on the apparatus. b) The traffic advisor shall be mounted in a recess on the rear face of the body above the rear compartment.

Page 4 of 64



PS05032



VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

c) A controller for the Traffic Advisor shall be supplied and installed in the cab, in easy reach of the driver. d) The Traffic Advisor shall be wired into the emergency light package and to be activated with the Zone C upper lights, in a flash pattern.

2.1.24 Auxiliary Brake Light

a) A Whelen PAR00XRR LED brake/tail light shall be installed as an auxiliary brake light. b) The light shall be installed as high as possible at the rear of the body, wired into the brake light circuit.

2.1.25 Rear Work Lights

a) Two (2) Whelen 810 series work lights shall be installed as high as possible at the rear of the body, wired with the back up lights above the tail light bezel on the left side. b) The switch shall be installed on the left rear face of the main body activate the work lights. c) The rear work light circuit shall be deactivated when the park brake is disengaged.

2.1.26 Cab Ground Lights

a) Weldon model 9185-40003 lights shall be installed beneath the apparatus in areas where personnel may be expected to climb on and off of the apparatus. b) The lights shall illuminate the ground within 30” of the apparatus. c) These lights shall activate on the side that a cab door is opened.

2.1.27 Emergency Lights

a) The emergency warning light package shall meet or exceed the requirement of NFPA 1901 – 2003 edition.

b) All emergency lights shall be controlled through a colour touch pad display in the centre multiplex console, within easy reach of driver. c) A notice of compliance that the emergency light package meets NFPA 1901 – 2003 edition shall be delivered with the apparatus.d) All clear lights are to deactivate when the parking brake is applied.

2.1.28 Upper Zone A Warning Lights

a) There shall be one (1) Whelen FN72QLED 72” long light bar installed on the forward section of the chassis cab roof. b) It shall be equipped with four (4) forward facing LEDs, one (1) centre clear LED, two (2) side facing LEDs and two rear corner LEDs.c) The light bar shall be equipped with red and clear lenses on the front and sides.

Page 5 of 64



PS05032



VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

2.1.29 Lower Zone A Warning Lights

a) Four (4) approved Whelen model 60R00FRR, red LED-warning lamps shall be installed on the front of the cab in polished chrome housings mounted above the headlamps.

2.1.30 Upper Zone B & D Warning Lights

a) There shall be one (1) approved Whelen model 60R00FRR, red LED warning lamps installed on each side of the main body in polished chrome housings, mounted above compartment doors.

2.1.31 Lower Zone B & D Warning Lights

a) There shall be two (2) Whelen 60ROOFRR LED red, wide angle warning lights installed on the cab front radius to act as intersection lights. b) There shall be two (2) Whelen model 60R00FRR LED lights with 6EFLANGEs installed, in the rear wheel well area, one (1) each side. c) There shall be two (2) Whelen model 60R00FRR LED lights with 6EFLANGEs installed in the lower, mid-point warning zone, under the 2 ½” Crosslay hose bed.

2.1.32 Upper Zone C Warning Lights

a) There shall be two (2) Whelen model B6RLRA1P red rotating beacons with amber LED’s installed high at the upper rear corners of the apparatus. b) The rotators shall have red lenses and the LED shall have amber lenses. c) The Traffic Advisor shall be wired into the emergency light package and to be activated with the Zone C upper lights.

2.1.33 Lower Zone C Warning Lights

a) There shall be one (1) Whelen model 60R00FRR LED light with 6EFLANGE installed on each side of the lower warning zone in a Cast 3 housings.

2.1.34 Wheel well Liners

a) Full width, wheel well liners shall be installed on the cab.

b) The liners shall be made of 16” wide, 1/8” aluminum and come with polished aluminum fenderettes.

2.1.35 Mirrors

a) There shall be two (2) RETRAC Model 1178H West Coast style mirrors provided. b) The full flat glass shall be heated, remotely controlled by switches on the dash.

Page 6 of 64



PS05032



VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

c) The mirrors shall be Dual Vision, motorized and heated with a 7” x 16” mirror and convex in the lower portion of the mirror head.

d) The mirror heads shall be mounted on stainless steel bow swing away type arms mounted to the cab doors.

2.1.36 Glass

a) All cab glass except the front windshield or the drivers or officers door glass shall be dark automotive tint applied in the glass. b) All cab glass shall be installed at the same height as the windshields. c) Left and right windshield shall use the same interchangeable glass. d) The front and rear doors shall have a full roll down windows.

2.1.37 Cab Tilt Actuation

a) The entire cab shall tilt 45 degrees to allow for ease of maintenance. b) A remote control unit on a 25 foot long cord shall control the electric over hydraulic, cab tilt actuation lift pump.

c) The lift system shall have an ignition interlock and red lock down indicator lamp, which shall illuminate when holding the “down” switch to indicate safe road operation.

d) It shall be necessary to have the master battery switch “on” and the park brake set in order to tilt the cab.

e) Two (2) cab tilt cylinders shall be provided with a “velocity fuse” in each cylinder port. f) There shall be two (2) spring loaded hydraulic hold down hooks installed outboard of the frame for holding the cab securely to the frame.

g) Steel safety “Tube” shall be installed on the right side, cab lift cylinder to prevent accidental cab lowering.

h) The safety tube shall fall over the right side cylinder when the cab is in the “up” position and a cable release system shall also be provided to clear the safety tube from the cylinder when lowering the cab.

i) An audible alarm shall be wired into the cab tilt system, which will sound when the cab is raised or lowered.

j) There shall be a manual cab lift pump that is attached to the electric over hydraulic tilt pump provided.

k) It shall be mounted in an enclosed box, with an outside door and latch, on the right side of the completed body in such a place as to be usable after the body and all equipment have been installed. l) A receptacle shall be provided to plug in the remote control and cord installed in the right hand side of the front bumper.

2.1.38 Cab Interior

Page 7 of 64



PS05032



VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

a) The Interior cab volume and arrangement will be assessed by the VF&RS for acceptable placement of electronic communication equipment consisting of but not limited to, one mobile radio, one Mobile Data Terminal and one cellular phone. b) The cab dash and header trim shall be black ABS.c) A low rise fixed type engine cover shall be an integral part of the cab and made of fibreglass reinforced ABS plastic shell a maximum of 29” tall and tapered at the sides.d) The cover shall incorporate a latching electrical access cover.e) The underside of the cover shall be heavily insulated with at least 1” multi-layer foam with a non-conductive Mylar backing, held in place with adhesive, aluminum pins and retention caps. f) The sides, roof and rear wall of the cab shall contain a blanket of 1” thick multi-layered additional insulation to improve air conditioning and/or heating as well as reducing road noise. g) A glove box with a hinged door shall be provided in front of the officer’s seat. h) The interior metal surfaces of the cab shall be painted the same colour as the lower exterior colour.i) The flooring shall be a non slip vinyl covered, foam backed multi-layered, black floor mat with sound deadener attached, The vinyl flooring shall meet the anti skid requirements of NFPA 1901 – 2003 edition. j) Two (2) coat hooks and four (4) helmet hooks shall be installed on the rear inside back wall.

2.1.39 Interior Lighting

a) One (1) 7” red dome lamp with switch shall be mounted in the headliner of the cab front to the left of the officer seat. b) One (1) 7” clear dome lamp with switch shall be mounted in the headliner of the cab front to the left of the officer seat. c) Two (2) 7” red dome lamps and two (2) 7” clear dome lamps with switches shall be installed in the crew area headliner inboard of the outer rear facing seats, the 7” dome lamps shall be door switch activated in addition to the push button switch. d) Four (4) red/clear surface mount Whelen 50R03FRR LED flashing warning lights, each mounted in 5EFLANGEs with a 5BRUSH guard, one (1) shall be located in the moulded panel of each door and activated when the door is opened. e) Two (2) light modules with dual map lights shall be located in the headliner, over the Driver. f) A red flashing door ajar light Whelen 50R03FRR LED mounted in 5EFLANGEs and labelled “Do Not Move Apparatus” shall be centred in the headliner, wired to indicate an open door on the cab when the parking brake is released. g) An audible alarm shall be wired to the open door light, which will sound when a door is open, and the air brake is off with the vehicle in gear.

2.1.40 Dash Instrument Panel

Page 8 of 64



PS05032



VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

a) The dash shall be ergonomically designed so that all controls and gauges are in the centre of the dash and easily accessible to the driver and able to be tilted for maintenance. b) The instrument panel shall contain the following red backlit gauges and LED indicators, all within clear view of the driver. c) One (1) electronic tachometer with integral digital hour meter.

d) One (1) electronic speedometer with digital odometer.

e) One (1) three (3) function gauge with front air pressure, rear air pressure and fuel level. f) One (1) air application gauge. g) One ampere hour gauge. h) One (1) four (4) function gauge with oil pressure, coolant temperature, transmission temperature and voltmeter. i) The centre of the instrument panel shall contain a cluster of indicator lamps informing the driver of the following:

2.1.40.1 Red Lamps

a) Low air system one (1) primary and two (2) secondary. b) Low engine oil pressure. c) High engine coolant temperature. d) High transmission temperature. e) Low coolant level. f) Air filter restriction. g) Low fuel level to activate at ¼ full. h) Stop engine. i) High or low voltage. j) Parking brake set.

2.1.40.2 Green Lamps

a) Directional indicators. b) Auxiliary braking device active. c) Low traction. d) High idle active.

2.1.40.2 Yellow Lamps

a) Check engine. b) Check transmission. c) ABS brakes. d) Water in fuel

2.1.40.4 Blue Lamp

a) High beam headlight on.

Page 9 of 64



PS05032



VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

2.1.40.5 Audible Warning System for the following:

a) Low air system. b) Low engine oil pressure. c) High engine coolant temperature. d) Low coolant level. e) High transmission temperature. f) High and low voltage. g) Stop engine

2.1.41 Main Dash Switch Panel

a) The main rocker switch panel shall include fourteen (14) red LED backlit, labelled rocker switches. b) All emergency lights shall have individual back lit heavy duty rocker style switches, in the centre of the console, within easy reach of driver, wired through a master switch within that panel. c)

The single row of switches shall be installed in the centre of the electrical housing on a hinged panel that includes 4 rocker switches on driver’s dash for:

i. Secondary Braking On/Off switch. ii. Secondary Braking Variance Control – High/Low. iii. Spare. iv. Spare

d) The pump shift shall be wired though interlocks to prevent its activation or deactivation when the apparatus is on fast idle and in pump or road gear or if the parking brake is not engaged. e) There shall be a rocker switch on the main dash panel that will isolate the electric horns from the air horns, labelled “city/road”. f) The system will include inside and outside ambient temperature monitoring and “climate control”.

g) The left side of the panel shall contain a rocker type headlight switch with instrument lamp slide dimmer and intermittent windshield wiper/washer switch.

h) There shall be a back-up alarm disable switch installed in the cab dash within reach of the driver. i) The backup alarm, disconnect switch will automatically reset to sound the next time the transmission is placed in reverse.

2.1.42 Windshield Washer/Wipers

a) Intermittent electric wipers with a single motor and electric powered “wet arm” type windshield washers shall be provided.

2.1.43 Siren

Page 10 of 64



PS05032



VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

a) There shall be a Whelen 295 HFSQ1 surface mount 12 volt control with noise cancelling microphone, installed in a location decided by VF&RS at a pre construction meeting. b) Siren control to be installed with a swivel base for easy access by driver and officer. c) A Whelen speaker model # SA122FMP2, shall be recessed in the front bumper on the driver’s side and to be easy removed for repair. d) The siren shall be highly RF immune.

e) The siren shall meet the requirements of CSA J-1849.

2.1.44 Sun visors

a) There will be padded sun visors for the driver and officer.

2.1.45 Inside Rear View Mirror

a) There shall be a large inside rear view mirror for the driver.

2.1.46 Map Light

a) A Sunnex, gooseneck style instrument panel map light shall be installed on the right hand side of the dash.

2.1.47 Spot Light

a) A Collins Pulsar 500 hand-held spotlight with a momentary switch shall be supplied powered by a 12-volt supply, and shall be mounted to the right of centre of the engine tunnel. b) It shall have a coil-cord, a momentary switch and a 500,000 candle-power lamp.

2.1.48 Communication System

a) The Proponent will install the mobile radio and wiring for the MDT or laptop.b) The contractor shall install the VF&RS supplied radio, GPS and MDT antennas on the cab roof.c) There shall be two (2) sets of circuit breaker protected wiring with 12 volt power, 12 volt signal and ground wires installed for the MDT and radio.

2.1.49 Intercom System

a) One (1) Sigtronics US-67-S intercom system with six (6) plug-in modules, five (5) headsets and all necessary equipment for two-way radio access and monitoring shall be installed in the following areas:

i. One (1) only US-67-S master station mounted in front cab area. ii. Two (2) in the cab for the driver and officer.

Page 11 of 64



PS05032



VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

iii. Two (2) in the crew area. iv. One (1) at the pump panel.

v. One (1) at the rear of the hose body, left rear corner.

b) All cables for installation will be Sigtronics cables. c) There shall be two (2) SE-2 SKPTT headsets c/w microphones supplied. d) There shall be three (3) SE-8 headsets c/w microphones supplied. e) There shall be two (2) Sigtronics portable radio adapters, suitable for Ericson “Jaguar” radios supplied.

2.1.50 12 Volt Power Supply

a) A 12 volt cigarette lighter type receptacle shall be provided in the cab dash on the officer’s side to act as a power source.

2.1.51 Map Console

a) There shall be a map console constructed of aluminum with a thermoplastic material finish installed in the chassis cab to be mounted in an area to be decided at the pre construction meeting.b) The console shall be approximately 9” tall, 13” wide and 10” deep. c) The console shall hold three (3) binders up to 2-1/2” thick each.

2.1.52 Seats Risers

a) The driver and officer seats shall have a raised aluminum box with a compartment built in, approximately 8.00” high x 16.25” wide x 17.38”. b) They should have a hinged door and an opening of approximately 6” high x 12.50” wide.

2.1.53 Drivers Seat

a) The driver seat shall be a 911 Seats Inc. model “ABTS” high back 6 way electric seat, with a mechanical suspension and a tapered/padded seat cushion.

b) The seat back and bottom shall be covered with an Imperial 1200 vinyl coated polyester material meeting SAE J-833. c) This seat shall be equipped with a red, integrated 3-point shoulder harness, lap belt and an automatic retractor built into the seat assembly.

2.1.54 Officers Seat

a) The driver seat shall be a 911 Seats Inc. model “ABTS” high back, 6 way electric seat, with a mechanical suspension and a tapered/padded seat cushion

Page 12 of 64



PS05032



VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

b) The seat back and bottom shall be covered with Imperial 1200 vinyl coated polyester material, meeting SAE J-833.c) This seat shall be equipped with a red, integrated 3-point shoulder harness, lap belt and an automatic retractor built into the seat assembly.

2.1.56 Forward facing Seats

a) There shall be three (3) centre forward facing 911 Seats Inc. “ABTS” SCBA seat with flip up seat cushions and seat backs that include an angled, hinged, split headrest installed at the back wall of the cab.

b) There shall be ZICO positive latching SCBA brackets installed that meet the requirements of NFPA 1901 – 2003 edition, for 6” bottles.c) The seat back and bottom shall be covered with Imperial 1200 vinyl coated polyester material meeting SAE J-833. d) These seats shall be equipped with a red integrated 3-point shoulder harness with lap belt and an automatic retractor built into the seat assembly.e) The two (2) centre forward facing seats shall be installed on a 42” wide aluminum riser mounted in the centre of the cab at the rear wall, the riser shall have hinged doors on each end.

2.1.57 SCBA Latching System

a) The mounting method for the SCBA’s shall be of a type that positively latches around the cylinder and will hold when subjected to a 9 “G” force and the release mechanism shall be readily accessible to the user while seated

2.1.58 EMS Compartment

a) There shall be an EMS compartment installed in the chassis cab, in place of the right rear facing seat and is 32” tall, 32” wide, and 16” deep and be constructed of 1/8” aluminum. b) There shall be one (1) adjustable shelf provided in the compartment. c) The compartment shall have a roll up door provided on the outside of the cab and inside rear.

d) The compartment shall have a built in new and used disposable glove containers, the type and locations to be determined at the pre construction meeting by the VF&RS

e) The exterior of the compartment shall be covered in thermoplastic, liner material. f) A compartment light activated by a switch on the roll-up door shall be provided in the upper and lower sections of the compartment.

2.1.59 Siren Inner Assist Bars

a) Two (2) black powder coated cast aluminum assist bars shall be provided and installed on the inside of the rear crew doors the full width of the window glass.

Page 13 of 64



PS05032



VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

b) The rails shall be located at the retracted door window glass level and will protect the exposed window glass area.

c) There shall be a driver's compartment installed in the chassis cab in place of the left rear facing seat. The 1?8" aluminum compartment is to be 32" wide and 16" deep. There shall be one (1) adjustable shelf provided in the compartment. The compartment is to have a roll up door provided on the outside od the cab and inside the rear. the exterior of the compartment shall be covered in theroplastic liner material. A Compartment light, activated by a switch on the roll up door, shall be provided in the upper and lower sections of the compartment.

2.1.60 HVAC System

a) A ceiling mounted HVAC system shall be provided consisting of an overhead heater/defroster/air conditioning unit mounted in a central location with dash-mounted controls. b) The condenser shall be roof mounted on the left side of the cab.

c) The HVAC system should include forward facing louvers for defrosting the windshield and rearward facing louvers to direct air at the crew, at the driver and officer.

d) The system should be able to produce 60,000 Btu’s of heat, 32,000 Btu’s of cooling and be capable of lowering the cab interior temperature from 100 degrees to 70 degrees within thirty minutes.

2.1.61 Manufacturing Labels

a) A permanent plate shall be mounted in the driver’s compartment on the seat riser specifying the quantity and type of the following fluids that may be used in the apparatus for normal maintenance. b) Where a fluid is not applicable to the unit, the plate shall be marked N/A to inform the service technician who may not be familiar with the apparatus. c) The following fluids as a minimum shall be listed on that plate:i. Engine oil. ii. Engine coolant. iii. Transmission fluid. iv. Transfer case fluid. v. Primer fluid. vi. Drive axle fluid. vii. Air-conditioning refrigerant. viii. Power steering fluid. ix. Cab tilt mechanism fluid. x. Transfer case fluid. xi. Equipment rack fluid. xii. Air compressor system lubricant. xiii. Generator system lubricant. d) A permanent plate shall be affixed in the driver’s area that states the maximum number of personnel allowed riding on the apparatus at any time.

Page 14 of 64



PS05032



VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

e) A permanent plate shall be affixed, in the rear cab seating area, in plain sight of the crew that states “ALL OCCUPANTS MUST BE SEATED AND BELTED WHEN THE APPARATUS IS IN MOTION.”f) A sign shall be affixed in the chassis cab, in plain sight of the driver that states the overall height of the apparatus. g) All other appropriate labels to ensure safe operation of the apparatus shall be permanently affixed in conspicuous locations. h) There shall be a placard on the rear face of the body, in clear sight from the ground, which reads, "WARNING - DO NOT RIDE ON STEPS OR DECK AREAS WHILE THE APPARATUS IS IN MOTION. DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY MAY RESULT". i) A permanent plate shall be installed in the Driver's compartment which indicates the following: i. Filter Part Numbers for the Engine, Transmission, air and fuel systems. ii. Serial Number for the Engine and Transmission. iii. Delivered, certified weights of the front axle, rear axle and total completed weight. iv. Paint Code Brand and Codes. v. Body Builder Project Number.

j) A red “HAZARD” warning light shall be supplied and installed that if the park brake is not engaged it automatically illuminates to warn the operator that: i. A passenger door is open. ii. An equipment rack is not stowed. iii. The light tower is extended. iv. The light shall be mounted in plain view of the driver and labelled “DO NOT MOVE THE APPARATUS WHEN THE LIGHT IS ON”.

2.2 CHASSIS AND DRIVELINE COMPONENTS

2.2.1 Chassis Changes

a) All added equipment to the stock chassis, such as transmission, transfer case, pump, etc. are to be mounted in such a way as to allow for removal of each component, without requiring the cutting out of chassis cross members, other body modules or chassis reinforcements.

2.2.2 Weight Distribution

a) The overall size, weight and manoeuvrability of the finished apparatus is critical to the VF&RS, the Proponent shall submit an outline including: overall length, width, height, wheel base, turning radius, curb to curb, angle of approach & departure, all compartment sizes, individual axle loads and fully loaded weight of the apparatus with their Proposal.

Page 15 of 64



PS05032



VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

b) The weight of the miscellaneous equipment is to be evaluated by the Proponent and a GVWR and GAWR shall be provided to safely carry the fully equipped apparatus including full water tank, pump, specified hose load, personnel weight and ground ladders.

c) Weight distribution shall not load the vehicle in such a manner as to exceed any individual axle rating, spring or spring hanger rating or tire and wheel rating. Axles are to carry the weight distribution as per S.A.E. Axle loading recommendations. d) Certified axle weight readings for all axles are to be furnished with each apparatus.

e) VF&RS would prefer:

i. Maximum axle loading 18,000 lbs. (8,035 kg.) for the front axle. ii. Maximum axle loading 21,000 lbs. (10,725 kg.) for the rear axle.

2.2.3 Overall Length and Wheelbase of Completed Vehicle

a) The VF&RS desire to have the overall length of the vehicle be as short as possible, while providing the necessary compartmentation for the equipment as specified, but it should not exceed 391” (32’ 6”). b) The wheelbase of the vehicle will be as short as possible but it should not exceed 189” (15’ 8”).

2.2.4 Maximum Height

a) The overall height of the vehicle shall be as low as possible, but not to exceed 125” (10’ 5”) when measured from the ground.

2.2.5 Front Axle

a) The front axle shall be an ArvinMeritor MFS –20 non-driving front steering axle with a 3.74” drop and a 71.00” KPI or VF&RS approved equal. b) The Capacity to be not less than 20,000 lbs. GAWR.

c) The front axle cramp angle shall be at least 48 degrees to the left and a minimum of 44 degrees turning to the right, when using the 385/65R 22.5, 20 ply front tires.

2.2.6 Oil Lubricated Front Wheel Bearings

a) The front axle wheel bearings shall be oil lubricated and the covers shall be Sentinel # STE – 348 4009 oil caps with an oil level, visual inspection window.

2.2.7 Front Springs

a) The springs shall be an elliptical type with nine (9) or more leafs, each 54” long, 4” wide with a military double wrapped front eye.

Page 16 of 64



PS05032



VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

b) Both spring eyes shall have case hardened, threaded Horton bushings installed with lubrication counter bore and lubrication land off cross bore with grease fittings.

c) The spring capacity shall meet or exceed the capacity of the front axle.

2.2.8 Front Wheels

a) There shall be three (3) front ALCOA Dura-Bright polished aluminum, hub piloted 10 stud disc 22.5 x 9.00 wheels. b) They will come complete with bright nut covers and hubcaps. c) The wheels shall be rated at 20,000 lbs. and for use with radial tires.

2.2.9 Front Tires

a) There shall be three (3) Goodyear 385/65R 22.5 20 ply “L” tubeless radial G286 highway tread. b) The tires shall be rated at 20,000 lbs. at 110lbs. air pressure.

2.2.9 ront Shock Absorbers

a) Two (2) mono-tubular design, gas charged shock absorbers shall be part of the front axle suspension package.

2.2.10 Steering Wheel and Column

a) The steering column shall be a seven (7) position tilt and telescopic type. b) The steering wheel shall be a minimum 18” in diameter and covered with black absorbite padding. c) The steering wheel shall contain a horn button, self-cancelling turn signal switch, four-way hazard switch and the headlamp dimmer switch on turn lever.

2.2.12 Power Steering

a) The steering gear shall be a hydraulic power assisted, model TRW TAS-85 with a hydraulic, power assist cylinder. b) A Vickers hydraulic power steering pump shall be gear driven from the engine.c) The steering ratio shall be 23.3:1 and have 6.2 turns stop to stop.

2.2.13 Rear Axle – Single

a) The rear axle shall be a ArvinMeritor model RS– 24 – 160 single reduction gearing or VF&RS approved equal.

b) It shall have a rated capacity of 24,000 lbs. GAWR.

c) The rear axle shall have Traction Control with a “mud and Snow” feature installed.

Page 17 of 64



PS05032



VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

d) The rear axle ratio to provide for maximum road speed of 55 mph (90 km/h). e) The drive axles in the rear axles must be full floating and of sufficient size to transmit the full torque of the engine/transmission.

f) The rear axle shall have oil lubricated wheel bearings.

2.2.14 Rear Suspension

a) The rear suspension shall be an Aero Glide air suspension with a single air bag on a tapered forged drop leaf spring with adjustable torque rods, with a rated capacity of 24,000 lbs. GAWR.

2.2.15 Rear Shock Absorbers

a) Two (2) mono-tubular design, nitrogen gas charged shock absorbers shall be part of the rear axle suspension package.

2.2.16 Rear Wheels

a) There shall be five (5) ALCOA Dura-Bright polished aluminum, hub piloted 10 stud disc 22.5 x 8.25 wheels with the correct outset.b) It shall be complete with bright nut covers and rear axle hub covers. c) The wheels shall be rated at 24,000 lbs. and for use with radial tires.

2.2.17 Rear Tires

a) There shall be five (5) rear tires shall be Goodyear 11R 22.5 16 PR “H” tubeless radial G124 traction tread.

b) The tires shall be rated at 24,000 lbs. at 110 psi. air pressure.

2.2.18 Drive Shafts

a) The drive shafts on the chassis shall have model 1810 “glide coat” splines on all slip shafts and be able to with stand the full torque developed by the engine and transmission. 2.2.19 Brakes

a) The brake system shall meet as a minimum, the testing requirement setout in NFPA 1901 – 2003 edition and SAE J-992. b) A rapid air build up air brake meeting CMVSS – 121 system and in compliance with NFPA 1901 – 2003 edition shall be provided. c) It shall include air reservoirs with a total not less than 4,100 cubic inch capacity. d) The brake system shall be complete with:

Page 18 of 64



PS05032



VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

i. Meritor Wabco anti-lock brake system on the front and rear axles.

ii. Haldex automatic slack adjusters on the rear brakes.

iii. An air compressor that produces a minimum of 16.5 CFM of air. iv. A primary and secondary air tank, separate air tank pressure gauges and an air gauge to indicate service brake applied air pressure. v. Manual water drain valves for each tank drain and each with an external pull cord extended to outside of body with individual identification. vi. A 1200 cu. In. air reservoir installed and isolated to act as a supply tank for operating air equipment, plumbed with a 90 psi pressure protection valve on the reservoir supply side, that will cut off air supply to all accessories when ignition switch is off. vii. Front axle brakes that are ArvinMeritor EX225H disc type brakes with 15” vented rotors providing a total of 120 sq. in. of braking area. viii. Rear axle brakes that are ArvinMeritor EX225H disc type brakes with 15” vented rotors providing a total of 120 sq. in. of braking area. ix. Air-operated spring brakes shall be fitted to rear axles to act as parking brake as well as emergency brake during low air pressure, with the controller mounted within easy reach of the driver and officer.2.2.20 Auxiliary Brakes

a) A front wheel service brake lock-up system shall be installed which will apply both the front air and rear spring brakes upon application of the PP-1 push pull valve that shall be in the cab, within easy reach of the driver.

2.2.21 Air Dryer

a) A model WABCO System Saver 1200 air dryer with a replaceable, spin on desiccant cartridge and automatic heated moisture ejector shall be installed with easy access for maintenance and draining, mounted in a location to be determined at the pre construction meeting by the VF&RS.

2.2.22 Nylon Air Line Tubing

a) A dual air system plumbed with colour coded, reinforced, nylon tubing airlines shall be installed.

b) The primary (rear) brake line shall be green, the secondary (front) brake line shall be red, the parking brake line, orange and the auxiliary outlet shall be blue.

c) Brass compression type fittings shall be used on the nylon tubing.d) All drop hoses shall be fibre reinforced neoprene covered hoses.

2.2.23 Air Tank Mounting

a) The air tanks shall be installed one (1) inch inboard of the frame rails.

Page 19 of 64



PS05032



VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

2.2.24 Vogel Lubrication Systems

a) A Vogel, Lubrication system shall be installed on the chassis.

b) The systems shall be capable of lubricating 22 grease points on the chassis and two (2) on the fire pump.

2.2.25 Frame

a) The frame shall be made of heat treated, alloy steel, frame rails with inner liner and sufficient cross members to provide a strong torsion resistant frame assembly.

b) All cross members to be bolted to main rails, bolting to take place through web section of main rails. c) Frame rail spacing shall be 34” outside, North American Standard.d) The frame side rails shall be a channel type with a minimum dimensions of 10 ¼” x 3 ½” x 3/8”. e) The frame material shall have yield strength of not less than 110,000 psi. f) There shall be a minimum of seven (7) fully reinforced bolted in cross members installed, the bolts will be a grade 8 or better. g) The builder shall not drill, burn, weld to or modify the frame in anyway that would cancel or shorten the warranty period. h) There shall be a lifetime warranty on frame and cross members.

2.2.26 Automatic Tire Chains

a) On Spot automatic tire chains shall be installed on the rear axle of the chassis.

b) The system shall include a switch on the dash with protective cover, installed within easy reach of the driver.

2.3 ENGINE, TRANSMISSION & ACCESSORIES

2.3.1 Engine

a) An in-line six (6) cylinder, 4 cycle turbocharged, charge air cooled, diesel engine with a minimum of 500 Horsepower @ 2100 rpm and a torque of 1650 lb. ft. @ 1200 rpm with the latest version of Electronic Control unit shall be provided.

b) The engine Lubrication to be 100% full pressure with two (2) full flow oil filters, one (1) primary full flow, one (1) secondary full flow, and one Puradyn by-pass filter.

c) Both full flow filters shall be spin on style, all filters shall be mounted in locations to be determined at the pre construction meeting. d) The crankcase pan is to be shaped to allow for operation on grades up to 20%.

Page 20 of 64



PS05032



VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

2.3.2 Electronic Pressure Governor

a) An electronic pressure governor shall be installed to continuously monitor the total fire pump operation and display vital engine operating parameters. b) The electronic pressure governor shall be located on the operator’s pump panel c) The pressure governor head shall control a pressure sensitive governor, providing for increasing or decreasing pump pressure or engine rpm. d) The pressure governor shall display engine temperature, oil pressure, engine RPM and voltage.

e) Any operating parameter that would cause a check engine or stop engine condition shall be displayed on the electronic information message display.

f) All engine management shutdown features shall be disabled. g) A wiring harness with connectors extending to the pump panel area with circuits provided for an electronic pressure governor, multiplexed gauges and high idle actuation shall be provided.

2.3.3 Automatic Engine Alarm

a) An automatic engine alarm for low oil pressure and or high coolant temperature with audible alarm shall be installed at driver and pump panel. b) Alarm to be audible above engine noise.

2.3.4 Emergency Shut down

a) An air intake flapper valve shall be mounted between the turbocharger intake and the air cleaner, a reset lever shall be provided on the flapper assembly that shall be accessible without tilting the cab.

b) Two (2) emergency shut down controls are required one (1) at the pump panel and one (1) in the cab.

2.3.5 Starter

a) A heavy-duty 12 volt electric starter shall be supplied, as per NFPA 1901 – 2003.

2.3.6 Alternator

a) A Leece Neville 320 amp, 12 volt alternator shall be provided.b) The alternator shall supply a minimum of 100 amps at engine idle. c) Alternator shall have a dual, ½” V belt drive or equal installed to provide power transfer with no belt slippage at full power demand.

d) A heavy-duty, remote mounted, transistorised voltage regulator shall be supplied and installed in a cool location.

2.3.7 Drain plugs

Page 21 of 64



PS05032



VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

a) There shall be magnetic drain plugs on the differential and crankcase.

2.3.8 Cooling System

a) The radiator shall be a cross-flow design constructed completely of aluminum with welded side tanks.

b) The radiator shall be located below the charge air cooler to allow a single depth core and efficient cooling system designed to maintain cooling during all fire fighting conditions, with a minimum 1200 sq. in. frontal surface area. c) The radiator shall have a complete de-aeration system capable of removing entrapped air from the system and equipped with a drain cock to drain the coolant for serviceability. d) The cooling system shall be equipped with a separate expansion tank that allows the system to be filled and will include a low coolant probe and a sight glass to monitor the coolant level. e) The cooling system shall have a “Fully Formulated Antifreeze” installed as per engine manufacturers specifications and Supplemental Coolant Additive as a backup to the Fully Formulated Antifreeze if required. f) Silicone radiator and heater hoses with stainless steel constant torque clamps shall be used though out the cooling system. g) A low engine coolant indicator light and alarm shall be provided. h) The cooling system shall have sufficient capacity to keep the engine properly cooled under all conditions of driving or pumping operations. i) The cooling system shall be designed to meet or exceed the engine and or transmission manufacturer and EPA requirements.

2.3.9 Charge Air Cooler

a) There shall be a charge air cooler of a cross-flow design constructed completely of aluminum with welded side tanks. b) The charge air cooler shall be located above the radiator to allow a single depth core and efficient cooling system. c) The charge air system shall be installed with silicone hoses with stainless steel “T” style clamps.

2.3.10 Heat Exchanger

a) A supplementary single bundle type heat exchanger shall be provided to allow the use of water from the discharge side of the fire pump to cool the engine coolant.

b) It shall be plumbed as to not allow water from the fire pump to intermix with the engine coolant. c) The heat exchanger is to be installed between the engine and the radiator without a shut-off valve.

Page 22 of 64



PS05032



VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

d) A stainless steel valve on the pump operator’s station shall control this cooling system, labelled Engine Cooler.

2.3.11 Engine Exhaust

a) The exhaust system shall be installed to discharge below frame rails on passenger side away from pump panel control station. b) Exhaust shall be 5” diameter pipe and exit at a 90 degree angle on the horizontal in front of the right rear duals. c) Stainless steel flex tubing is to be installed between exhaust pipe and muffler. d) The system joints shall be connected with lapping band clamps.e) The exhaust system shall accept a Neiderman 45 degree exhaust extraction system.

2.3.12 Fuel Filters, Primer Pump and Fuel Lines

a) A primary fuel filter, Racor model # 490R-30 with electric fuel primer pump shall be provided and be activated by a fuel primer momentary switch located on a panel under the dash.

b) A check valve and by-pass system shall be installed for normal draw of fuel for the engine fuel pump.

c) A 10 micron, spin on secondary fuel filter or a manufacturer approved equal shall be provided. d) A fuel shut off valve shall be installed in the fuel draw line at the primary fuel filter to allow the fuel filter to be changed without loss of fuel to the fuel pump, fuel filters located for easy access.

2.3.13 Fuel Tank

a) The fuel tank shall have a capacity of fifty (50) IG’s.

b) The fuel tank shall be mounted under the frame, behind the rear axle on strap style hangers bolted at the front and rear. c) The tank shall have a vent port to facilitate rapid filling without “blow-back” and have a roll over check ball with separate vent. d) There shall be a removable access plate in the main body to allow the fuel sender to be removed. e) A 2” NPT fill ports on the left side of the tank shall be installed and available for left hand fill. f) A ½” NPT drain plug shall be installed centred in the bottom of the tank.g) Steel wire braid reinforced rubber supply and return hoses with reusable fittings shall be installed between the fuel tank and engine.

2.3.14 Air Filters

a) The air cleaner(s) shall be Farr #62891-001 dry type with a replaceable element.

Page 23 of 64



PS05032



VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

b) The air cleaner shall have an outside air intake with an ember separator filter and an air restriction warning indicator light in the instrument cluster to show when the air cleaner element requires replacement.

c) An air restriction indicator gauge will be mounted on the dash panel, it shall provide a graduated scale/colour coded warning indication of a clogged air filter.

d) Air pickup for the air cleaner to be external from engine compartment and positioned not to pick up rain water or road splash water.

2.3.15 Transmission

a) The transmission shall be an Allison 5 – speed automatic transmission model 4000EVPR with a modulated hydraulic output shaft retarder that is controlled through the brake application foot valve. b) There shall be an Allison, seven (7)-position retarder control lever, model #29521372 provided to vary the output retarder’s level of intensity. c) The lever shall be mounted to the right of the driver and have a graduated control, ranging from the OFF position to full ON. d) There shall be two (2) lights mounted on the dash, in easy access of the driver, one (1) to indicate retarder activation and one (1) to indicate retarder overheating. e) The transmission is to have opening for a gear driven, power take off. f) There shall be an Allison, pressure sensitive, range selector, touch pad provided, located on the right side of the driver, in clear view and easy reach. g) The transmission shall be programmed with a “mode” function for fifth gear overdrive. h) The transmission shall be filled with transynd synthetic fluid or VF&RS approved equal. i) The transmission shall be equipped with an air to oil cooler located below the radiator.j) The transmission cooler shall be mounted in a manner to allow maximum approach angle by not protruding below the frame more than an inch.k) The transmission cooler shall be constructed completely of aluminum with welded side tanks. The transmission shall have two (2) internal oil filters.

2.3.16 Fuel and Engine Management Systems

a) There shall be a fuel management unit, supplied by VF&RS installed in a location to be determined.b) The Horsepower of the engine shall be able to be controlled to pre-set horsepower ratings depending on whether the apparatus is in pump gear or road.

c) The wiring drop out for this system shall consist of;

i. One (1) 14 gauge 12 volt power. ii. One (1) 14 gauge 12 Vbatt signal. iii. One (1) 14 gauge ground. iv. One (1) speed pulse signal.

2.4 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

Page 24 of 64



PS05032



VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

2.4.1 Starting System

a) A single 12 volt, starting system shall be installed per NFPA 1901 – 2003. b) The starting system shall be supplied with the following:

c) One (1) Cole-Hersee # 2484 master battery switch.

d) One (1) Cole-Hersee # EX26654A ignition switch c/w keyless ignition and starter button. e) One (1) starter button. f) One green LED indicator for battery “on”. g) One green LED indicator for ignition “on”.

2.4.2 Batteries

a) There shall be six (6) DELCO BCI-31 950 CCA maintenance free 12 volt batteries with minimum 210 minute reserve capacity, suppressed as per SAE J - 551.

b) The batteries shall be mounted so that the batteries can be checked. c) 3/0 welding type dual path, heavy-duty battery cables with soldered type cable ends, as per SAE J-541 shall be used.

d) Battery boxes are to be covered with a stainless steel cover and lined on the bottom with anti-acid coating and having drain holes for washing the trays out.

2.4.3 Battery Jumper Studs

a) Battery jumper studs shall be provided under the driver’s side step, the studs shall allow the vehicle to be jump-started or the cab raised in an emergency due to battery failure.

2.4.4 Battery Conditioner

a) One (1) Kussmaul Auto Charge Model # 35/10, 35 amp battery charger and 10 amp battery conditioner shall be installed in the cab, behind the driver’s seat. b) The battery charger shall incorporate a 10 amp Battery Saver with a battery saver filter to provide a clean filtered 12 volt power supply for a mobile data terminal, radio and rechargeable hand held lights. c) The battery charger/conditioner shall be supplied power by a 120 volt shoreline, connected to a 120 volt/20 amp receptacle, Hubbell - HBL6331CN, with a spring loaded snap cover, located on the cab corner in front of the driver’s door. d) The remote charge indicator shall be located in the cab on the left side of the dash and shall be viewed through the bottom of the left windshield.

2.4.5 12 Volt Electrical Panel

Page 25 of 64



PS05032



VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

a) The main electrical panel shall be located in a highly weather resistant box. b) The panel shall contain a board with permanent sockets for relays, diode blocks, and using automatic reset circuit breakers. c) Three harnesses shall feed the main electrical panel, one for the cab, one for the pump compartment and one for the main harness from the body. d) The main body harness shall be connected to individual compartment harness’s and shall have a minimum of 10 spare wires, complete from one the end of the harness to the other. e) An apparatus wiring panel, constructed of aluminum with an abraded finish shall be installed on the officer side bulkhead, below the dash and shall include a minimum of ten (10) spare circuits:i. One (1) 30 amp. ii. Three (3) 20 amp. iii. Three (3) 15 amp. iv. Three (3) 15 amp relays and breakers with trigger wires to the rocker switch panel. f) All bulkhead connectors shall be physically attached to the box in such a way as to afford easy access to the connectors. g) The connectors shall be the Deutsche series, with sealing plugs for any sockets not containing a wire. h) An “O” ring seal shall be an integral feature of the bulkhead connectors to eliminate the chance of water entering the connection and causing corrosion.

i) At any place where the harness or sub-harness passes through metal, heavy grommets shall be installed.

j) All sockets relays and equipment shall be clearly labelled. k) Any circuit, which draws 15 amperes or more, shall be switched through relays.l) Individual loads shall be wired to individual automatic reset circuit breakers. m) The circuit breakers shall be sized for the individual loads. n) There shall be two (2) sets of 12-volt power and grounding studs provided and installed behind the electrical centre cover for mobile radio and Mobile Data Terminal. o) A 40 amp self-resetting circuit breaker will be located at the batteries for circuit protection.

2.4.6 Wiring Harnesses

a) Wiring harnesses shall be the automotive type, engineered specifically for the builder’s apparatus and under no circumstances shall diodes, resistors, or fusible links be located within the wiring harness.

b) All components shall be located in an easy to access wiring junction box or the main circuit breaker area.

c) All wire shall meet the white book, baseline, advanced design transit coach specification and Society of Automotive Engineers recommended practices.

Page 26 of 64



PS05032



VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

d) It shall be stranded copper wire core with cross-linked polyethylene insulation complying with SAE specification J-1128.

e) Each wire shall be colour coded and hot stamped with its number and function every three “, starting one inch from the end and continuing throughout the entire harness.

f) All terminals on the ends of the wiring harness shall be soldered unless a machine is used that gives an even and precise pressure for the terminal being used and all terminals given a adequate pressure pull test to insure their integrity.

2.4.7 Multiplex Electrical Management System

a) The apparatus shall be equipped with a V– MUX, Multiplex Management system, NO EXCEPTIONS.b) The Multiplex system shall be of a “Peer to Peer “ type.c) The modules shall have the ability to use Pulse Width Modulation at the outputs.d) The system shall be able to detect a short or open condition and report the problem in “real time”, by text-based message(s). e) The system shall have the ability to control the HVAC system. f) The system shall have the ability to shed electrical loads at least to eight (8) different voltage levels and assign a level to any or all outputs. g) The system shall have the ability to sequence electrical loads from 0 to 8 levels on any load(s). h) The system shall be able to flash any output in either an A or B phase and use a logic signal to shut down needed outputs when in park, or any one of several combined interlocks. i) The flash rate can be selected at either 80, or 160 FPM, flashing outputs can also be used to warn of problems.j) The inputs shall have the ability to switch by a ground or vbatt signal. k) The inputs shall be filtered for noise suppression via hardware and software so that RF or dirty power will not trick an input into changing its status. l) There shall be a display that will be able to provide real time information regarding load shedding and system status, such as network traffic/errors or shorts and open circuits.m) The Multiplex system shall be able to perform in extreme temperature conditions, from – 40° to + 85° C (-40° to +185° F).n) The system shall be sealed against the environment, moisture, humidity, salt or fluids such as diesel fuel, motor oil or brake fluid.o) The modules shall be protected from over voltage and reverse polarity.p) There shall be no” added modules”, the module with the output signal shall perform the function. q) A multiplex electrical system shall be supplied that includes the following:

i. Dash mounted information centre with a 6”H x 4”W Vista colour screen display. ii. Systems diagnostic menu and controls.

Page 27 of 64



PS05032



VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

iii. Solid state switching. iv. Peer to Peer network architecture. v. Weatherproof Nodes. vi. Has complied with SAE J-1939 protocols.

2.4.8 Engine Tachometers & Hour Meter

a) There shall be one (1) electronic tachometer installed in the cab. b) There shall be one (1) engine hour meter mounted in cab dash.

2.4.9 120/240 Volt Hydraulic Generator

a) A Harrison model 7.9MAS, hydraulic PTO driven generator shall be installed located in Dunnage area above the pump. b) The continuous duty rating of the generator shall be 7,900 watts at 120/240 volts, current frequency shall be stable at 60 hertz.

c) A 12-volt cooling fan shall be installed on the power unit to ensure maximum performance under all conditions.

d) There shall be a minimum, five (5) gallon hydraulic oil reservoir supplied that is equipped with a 10-micron filter assembly in the tank on the return line. e) The hydraulic pump for the generator system shall be connected to the chassis transmission through a Chelsea “Hot Shift” PTO, electrically engaged power take-off system. f) The control to engage and disengage the power take-off system shall be installed in the chassis cab in the main switch panel.

2.4.10 120/240 volt Load Centre

a) The entire 120/240-volt electrical system shall be installed in compliance with the requirements of NFPA 1901 – 2003. b) This shall include all testing, labelling, wiring methodology, and dimensional requirements. c) Certification of compliance shall accompany the apparatus at the time of delivery.d) There shall be a 120/240-volt load centre incorporated into the 120/240 volt wiring system.

e) The load centre shall include adequate circuit breakers to protect the loads specified for this apparatus.

f) All 120/240 volt AC wiring shall be done in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 1901 – 2003, CSA, and City of Vancouver electrical codes.g) The load centre shall be located L1.

2.4.11 Circuit Over current Protection

a) Over-current protection devices shall be provided for circuits in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 1901 – 2003.

Page 28 of 64



PS05032



VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

b) The load centre shall be equipped with a non-GFI two pole main breaker when the six or more individual branch circuits are present. c) Over current protection devices shall be marked with permanent labels to identify the function of the circuit they protect.

2.4.12 Electrical Power Cord Reel

a) There shall be one (1) Hannay, 120 volt 20 Amp. electric rewind cord reel model # ECR1616-17-18, installed with a push button labelled “110 volt Reel Rewind” installed on the pump panel. b) The reel shall be equipped with 200’ of yellow STW Seoprene 105 degree Celsius 10/3 wire installed with a cable stop. c) Stainless steel rollers shall be supplied to prevent the cord from derailing or damage to the electrical cable if pulled in any direction.

2.4.13 Cord Reel Junction Box

a) There shall be one (1) Extenda-Lite model EJB-CS back lighted electrical junction box, equipped with four (4) electrical receptacles, two on each side.b) Each receptacle shall be equipped with a spring loaded snap cover and pre-wired to the cast aluminum junction box to supply power to the four receptacles.c) The extension cord shall be connected to the junction box through a heavy-duty water resistant strain relief and flexible extender.

d) Each side of the junction box shall be fitted with polypropylene faceplates that are backlit, so that plug orientation to the receptacles is quick and easy to align.

e) The receptacles shall be VFRS specified Hubbell twist 4710 cn, Twistlocks.

2.4.14 Light Tower

a) The apparatus shall be equipped with one (1) Command Light KL 495 – 3 X 1500 Watt, all electric, all weather, continuous 360 degree rotation light tower with an auto park and backlit feature. b) The unit shall not require tapping into vehicle braking system to be operated. c) Hydraulic or pneumatic type floodlights are not acceptable alternatives. d) The light bank shall have three (3) weatherproof, 1,500 watt, 240 volt quartz halogen lights. e) The light heads shall be mounted in a row of three (3) lights in the upright position. f) Power for light bank shall be transmitted through power collecting rings thus allowing 360+ degrees rotation in either direction, NO EXCEPTIONS.

g) Positioning of the light bank shall be accomplished with maintenance free, heavy duty 12 volt linear actuators.

h) The Command Lights assembly shall be all aluminum construction, with stainless steel shafts and bronze bushings for long life and low maintenance.

Page 29 of 64



PS05032



VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

i) Light tower shall be controlled with a hand-held umbilical line remote control with an "Auto-Park" automatic nesting feature. The command Light controls shall feature:

i. One (1) switch for each light bank. ii. One (1) light bank rotation switch. iii. One (1) switch for elevating lower stage. iv. One (1) switch for elevating upper stage.v. One (1) indicator light to indicate when light bank is out of roof nest position. vi. One (1) indicator light to indicate when light bank is rotated to the proper nest position. vii. One (1) "On/Off" switch for the top mounted strobe light.

j) The light tower shall have a full extension of 10' - 6" from mounted position and shall extend from nested position to full upright in 20 seconds. k) The overall size of the nested light tower shall be approximately 40" wide x 73" long x 12-3/4" high. l) A flashing warning light shall be provided in cab, indicating when a light tower is not in nested position. m) The operational envelope of the mast shall be automatically illuminated whenever the mast assembly is being raised, lowered, or rotated. n) A red strobe light shall be supplied with the Command Light and mounted at its highest position. o) The light tower shall be installed on the roof of the cab, on the right side with a protective shroud. p) A 15-foot remote controller cord shall be connected through and stored in R1.

2.5 MAIN BODY & PUMP MODULES

2.5.1 General

a) The fabrication of the sheet metal for the body module shall be by formed or bend and break construction.

b) All attachment points shall be heavily reinforced. c) To extend the expected service life of the vehicle, the body module shall be removable from the chassis frame, and be able to be installed on a new chassis. d) The apparatus body shall be constructed of a minimum of 3/16” 5052 H32 Marine Grade, smooth aluminum plate, this shall include compartment front panels, vertical side sheets, side upper rollover panels, rear panels and compartment door frames. e) The body compartment floors and exterior panels shall be constructed with not less than 3/16" (.187) aluminum 3003H-14 smooth plate. f) Interior compartment dividing walls shall be constructed with not less than 1/8" (.125) aluminum 3003H-14 smooth plate. g) Lighter gauge sheet metal will not be acceptable in these areas. h) The apparatus body shall be designed to provide maximum storage of equipment and other accessories outlined in these specifications.

Page 30 of 64



PS05032



VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

i) Anodized aluminum angle scuff plates shall be installed in the bottom sill area of all compartments and attached using a permanent bonding method. j) All side body compartments shall have sweep out type floors. k) There shall be a removable stainless steel cover to provide access to the fuel tank gauge-sending unit without the need to remove the fuel tank. l) The door side frame openings shall be formed "C" channel design.

m) An electrical wiring conduit raceway running the full length of exterior compartments shall be provided. This raceway shall contain all 12 volt wiring running to the rear of the apparatus, permitting easy accessibility to wiring.

n) Dead air space voids between compartments will not be an acceptable method of compartment construction.

o) Compartment floors shall have a "sweep-out" design with door opening threshold positioned lower than compartment floor. p) All seams in sheet metal below frame, and around the rear wheel well area shall be welded continuous to prevent moisture from entering compartments. q) All other interior seams and corners shall be sealed with silicone-based caulk prior to painting. r) Where bolted construction is used, slot-head, flush-type DZUZ Fasteners with “vibra tape” or anti vibration solution applied or VF&RS approved equal provided.

s) All interior access covers, back or side panels that are installed inside compartments where maintenance of hidden components will be required, shall be held in place by Hansen #46 small door fasteners with “vibra tape” or anti vibration solution applied, or VF&RS approved equal.

t) Metal screws or self-tapping screws or “pop rivets” shall not be used in any part of the apparatus.

2.5.2 Body Mounting and Subframe

a) To assure proper body alignment and clearance, the body subframe shall be constructed directly on the chassis. b) The chassis frame rails shall be fitted with 5/16" x 2" fibre reinforced rubber to isolate the body frame members from direct contact with chassis frame rails. c) The body subframe shall be constructed from 6061T6 aluminum alloy tubing, consisting of two (2) 2" x 6" x 1/4" aluminum tubes the same width as the chassis frame rails and welded to this tubing shall be cross members of 2" x 6" x 1/4" aluminum. d) The cross members shall extend the full width of the body to support the compartments.e) Crossmembers shall be located at front and rear of the body, below compartment divider walls, and in front and rear of wheel well opening.

f) Additional aluminum crossmembers shall be located as necessary to support walkway or heavy equipment.

g) The body subframe shall be fastened to the chassis frame with a minimum of six (6) spring loaded body mounts.

Page 31 of 64



PS05032



VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

h) Each mount shall be configured using a two piece encapsulated slide bracket. i) The two (2) brackets shall be fabricated of heavy-duty 1/4" thick steel and shall have a powder coat finish to prevent any corrosion. j) Each mounting assembly shall utilizing two (2) 5/8” diameter x 6" long grade L9 bolts and two (2) heavy duty springs. k) The assembly design shall allow the body and subframe to act as one (1) component, separate from the chassis. l) The spring loaded body mounts shall also prevent frame side rail or body damage caused by unevenly distributed stress and strains due to load and chassis movement. m) Body mountings that will not allow relief from chassis movement will not be acceptable.

2.5.3 Body Compartment Coating and Flooring

a) The interior of the body compartments shall be coated with a grey thermoplastic polyurethane coating. b) The coating shall be applied as to be durable enough to withstand everyday abuse of equipment removal and shifting. c) All compartment floors that do not have permanently mounted equipment shall be protected with DRI-DEK flooring tiles. d) The tiles shall be black with yellow angled leading edges.

2.5.4 Compartment Venting

a) Each body compartment shall be vented directly to the atmosphere in a manner that will reduce the amount of dirt and water that may enter the compartment.

b) Each compartment shall be equipped with drain holes to allow standing water to exit. c) SCBA compartment shall have a positive pressure fan system installed to assist the drying of the units.

2.5.5 Roll up Doors

a) All compartment doors shall be equipped with a Robinson brand roll-up door. b) The roll-up door shall have a satin finish, be a shutter type, with 34mm slats that roll onto a spool at the top front of the compartment. c) There shall be an aluminum drip rail with a non-abrasive seal at the top.

d) Each slat shall be equipped with nylon end shoes to assure operation without the need of constant lubrication.

e) Each door shall be equipped with replaceable side seals for the tracks and a bottom water dam style lip sill plate.

2.5.6 Compartment Lighting

Page 32 of 64



PS05032



VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

a) All high side compartments shall be furnished with a Whelen strip light, model # PSCACCR compartment light, Level 3, mounted on the backside of the compartment.

b) An automatic door switch shall activate these compartment lights.

c) All full height compartments shall be equipped with a Whelen strip light model # PSCACCR compartment light Level 3 mounted on the backside of the compartment.

d) An automatic door switch shall activate these compartment lights. e) All compartments that have a door opening larger than 42” wide shall have a Whelen strip light model PSCACCR compartment light Level 3 mounted on the rear side of the compartment. f) There shall be lighting installed in all compartments or enclosed equipment areas with four or more cubic feet of storage. g) There shall be one (1) additional compartment strip light installed under all adjustable shelves provided in the compartments. h) The lights shall be installed on the strut channels provided on the compartment wall. 2.5.7 Locking Door Handles

a) The roll-up doors shall be supplied with a keyed alike, full width handle, for ease of opening and nylon end shoes on every slat to assure operation without constant lubrication.

2.5.8 Shelving Channels

a) There shall be two sets of strut channels installed in three (3) standard height compartments. b) There shall be two sets of strut channels installed in three (3) full height compartments.

2.5.9 Adjustable Shelves

a) There shall be nine (9) adjustable shelves constructed of 3/16” aluminum with 2” lips on all sides. b) The shelves shall be coated with thermoplastic polyurethane coating. c) The shelves shall be fabricated in such a manner that liquids readily drain when spilled. d) The floor of the shelves shall be covered with DRI-DEK flooring tiles. e) The shelves shall be installed in body compartments as directed by VF&RS.

2.5.10 Roll Out Equipment Trays

a) There shall be four (4) roll out equipment trays installed in compartments L3, R3 & R1, R3. b) The roller assembly shall have a rated capacity of 300 lb. distributed load, 150 lbs. end load and shall have 100% extension capabilities.

Page 33 of 64



PS05032



VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

c) The trays shall be constructed of 3/16” aluminum sheet with 3” lips and coated with a thermoplastic polyurethane coating. d) The trays shall be equipped with a gas cylinder that shall hold the tray in the full out or full in position. e) There shall be one (1) roll out equipment tray installed in the rear compartment. f) The roller assembly shall have a rated capacity of 600 lb. distributed load, 350 lbs. end load and shall have 100% extension capabilities. g) The tray shall be constructed of 3/16” aluminum sheet with 3” lips and coated with a thermoplastic polyurethane coating. h) The trays shall be equipped with a gas cylinder that shall hold the tray in the full out or full in position. i) There shall be one (1) tip down, roll out equipment tray installed in L2 compartment. j) The roller assembly shall have a rated capacity of 250 lb. distributed load, and shall have 90% extension capabilities. k) The tray shall be constructed of 3/16” aluminum sheet with 3” lips and coated with a thermoplastic polyurethane coating. l) The trays shall be equipped with a gas cylinder that shall hold the tray in the full out or full in position.m) The frame shall be attached to the body to allow the mounting height to be adjustable.

2.5.11 Left side Compartment L1

a) There shall be a full height compartment located ahead of the rear wheels on the left side of the apparatus body, designated as L1. b) It shall be equipped with a Robinson brand roll-up door. c) The compartment shall have a door opening of approximately 26” wide x 64” high. d) The interior shall have a usable depth of approximately 24 “ in the lower portion and 13 “ in the upper portion.


a) There shall be a compartment located above the rear wheels on the left side of the apparatus body designated as L2. b) It shall be equipped with a Robinson brand roll-up door. c) The door shall have an opening of approximately 61” wide x 31” high. d) The interior shall have a usable depth of approximately 13 “.


a) There shall be a full height compartment located behind the rear wheels on the left side of the apparatus body, designated as L3. b) It shall be equipped with a Robinson brand roll-up door.

Page 34 of 64



PS05032



VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

c) The door shall have an opening of approximately 38” wide x 64” high.

d) The interior shall have a usable depth of approximately 13 “ in the top and traverse in the bottom.

2.5.14 Hard Suction Hose

a) There shall be storage for two (2) sections of 10' hard suction hose, located above the main hose bed on the left side of the hose bed compartments. b) Capacity shall be provided for three (3) pike poles in that compartment.

c) Two (2) 6" X 10' light weight, PVC style hard suction hose with hard coated aluminum 6” NST coupling shall be supplied by Proponent at the time of delivery.

2.5.15 Right Side Compartment R1

a) There shall be a full height compartment located ahead of the rear wheels on the right side of the apparatus body, designated as R1. b) It shall be equipped with a Robinson brand roll-up door. c) The door shall have an opening of approximately 26”wide x 64” high. d) The interior shall have a usable depth of approximately 24 “ in the lower portion and 13 “ in the upper portion.


a) An upper compartment shall be located above the wheel well, behind the hydraulic ladder rack on the right side of the apparatus body, designated as R2. b) It shall be equipped with a Robinson brand roll-up door. c) The door shall have an opening of approximately 36” wide x 31” high. d) The interior shall have a usable depth of approximately 13 “.


a) A full height compartment shall be located behind the rear wheels on the right side of the apparatus body, designated as R3. b) It shall be equipped with a Robinson brand roll-up door. c) The door shall have an opening approximately 38” wide x 64” high. d) The interior shall have a usable depth of approximately 12 “ in the upper portion and transverse in the lower.

2.5.18 Rear Compartment T1

a) A full height compartment shall be located at the rear of the apparatus body, designated as T1.

Page 35 of 64



PS05032



VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

b) It shall be equipped with a Robinson brand roll-up door. c) The door shall have an opening approximately 38” wide x 24” high. d) The interior shall have a usable depth of 30 “

2.5.19 Rear Tail Board

a) A bolt on running board shall be installed at the rear of the body to form a full width rear step area. b) The ends of this running board shall be flush with the body rubrail to maintain a uniform appearance.

c) The running board shall be constructed of Grip Strut.

2.5.20 Right Side Pump Access Door

a) There shall be a door on the right hand side pump panel to allow access to the pump compartment. b) The vertically hinged panel shall be of the single pan design and shall be positively latched in the closed position utilising a pushbutton latch, a gas strut shall be provided on the door. c) This door shall be wired into the hazard warning light circuit. d) An aluminum sill protector shall be installed on the bottom of the door opening to protect the paint from chipping and scratching.

2.5.21 Left Side Pump Panel Platform

a) An engineered, pull out platform shall be provided at the pump operator’s control panel that can support a minimum of 500 lbs.

b) The top surface of the platform shall be constructed of aluminum serrated bar grating for ease of maintenance and to provide a slip resistant surface for the operator.

c) The platform shall lock in both the retracted and the extended position.

2.5.22 Right Side Pump Panel Platform

a) An engineered pull out platform shall be provided at the right side panel that can support a minimum of 500 lbs.

b) The top surface of the platform shall be constructed of aluminum serrated bar grating for ease of maintenance and to provide a slip resistant surface. c) The platform shall lock in both the retracted and the extended position.

2.5.23 Main Hose Body

a) There shall be four (4) hose bed compartments in rear body:

i. One (1) sized to carry 1,000 feet of 5” single jacket rubber hose.

Page 36 of 64



PS05032



VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

ii. One (1) sized to carry 1,000 feet of 2 ½” double jacket hose. iii. One (1) sized to carry 300 feet of 2 ½” double jacket hose. iv. One (1) sized to carry 200 feet of 2 ½” double jacket hose.

b) The hose must not protrude above hose compartment walls. c) The VF&RS would prefer hose beds that are ergonomically designed for reloading hose.

2.5.24 Hose Bed Lining and Tiles

a) The interior walls of the hose beds shall be coated with a thermoplastic polyurethane coating. b) The coating shall be black in colour. c) All hose bed floors are to be fitted with interlocking “DURA DEK” or VF&RS approved equal.

2.5.25 Aluminum Hose bed Covers

a) The hose bed shall be covered with two (2) hinged aluminum doors. b) The doors shall be hinged on the outside as to allow them to be lifted up and out towards the outside of the body. c) The doors shall be equipped a gas strut to hold the doors in the open position, or up position for ease in reloading hose. d) The doors shall be tied into the open door circuit of the apparatus to warn the operator that the doors have been left up and open.e) A stationary hose bed divider shall be installed in the centre of the hose bed for support of the covers.

f) There shall be a heavy duty vinyl flap with a weighted bottom edge located on the rear of the hose bed cover

2.5.26 Crosslay Hose Bed Lining & Tiles

a) The interior of all Crosslays and the divider for the Crosslays shall be coated with a black thermoplastic polyurethane coating. b) The coating shall be applied as to be durable enough to withstand the abuse of flying hose couplings without chipping or cracking.

2.5.27 Folding Steps

a) Steps shall be provided at any area that personnel may need to climb and shall be adequately lighted. b) Steps shall be provided in the following locations:

i. Three (3) folding steps on the left front compartment. ii. Three (3) folding steps on the left rear compartment.

Page 37 of 64



PS05032



VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

iii. Three (3) folding steps on the right front compartment.iv. Three (3) folding steps on the right rear compartment.

c) All steps shall have a surface area of at least 35 square “ and shall be able to withstand a load of at least 500 lbs. d) Each folding step shall have two large open slots to prevent build-up of ice or mud and to provide a handhold when necessary.

2.5.28 Right Running Board Grip Strut Insert

a) There shall be a Grip Strut insert fabricated into the step area of the right running board with a splash pan provided below the grip strut insert located in the running board and rear step. 2.5.29 Stepping & Walking Surfaces

a) All designated exterior stepping, standing or walking surfaces shall be constructed of Grip Strut or textured Treadbright and provide a highly slip resistant surface, even when the surface is wet. b) All interior surfaces designated as stepping, standing, or walking areas shall be slip resistant when the surface is wet.

c) The running boards/ walkways shall be constructed of structural sheet metal that is integral with the body.

d) They shall be overlaid with aluminum Treadplate material to provide a slip resistant surface; the degree of slip resistance shall be in compliance with the intent of NFPA 1901 – 2003. e) The backside of the aluminum Treadplate overlays shall be sprayed with a clear coat sealer that is pliable and resistant to scratches and chips to provide an insulating barrier between dissimilar metals. f) When the overlays are reinstalled, they shall be sealed at the edges with a caulking compound. g) The overlays that are installed shall be insulated from the body with nylon shoulder washers that extend into holes in the overlays. h) Stainless steel cap nuts shall be employed where bolt ends may damage equipment or cause injury. i) Treadplate overlays shall be provided in the following areas:j) All walkways and running boards. k) The entire rear surface of the body. l) Outside front faces of the side compartments. m) The top surface of all side compartments, bending over the outside edge to form a driprail.

2.5.30 Dunnage Compartment

a) There shall be a dunnage compartment above the pump compartment. b) The Dunnage compartment shall serve as a location for mounting the generator.

Page 38 of 64



PS05032



VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

c) The compartment shall measure approximately 67” side to side and 50” front to back.

2.5.31 Generator Cover

a) The Treadplate cover shall be installed over the generator and be designed to allow for easy access to the generator for routine maintenance. b) The cover shall also be designed in compliance with the generator manufacturer’s airflow requirements.

2.5.32 Aluminum Crosslay Cover

a) There shall be an aluminum non-slip treadbrite cover installed over the Crosslay hosebed. b) The cover shall not interfere with hose loading when in the open position. c) The cover shall remain open due to automatically engaging mechanisms that require no type of latch operation to engage or release. d) The cover shall be provided with one, full length stainless steel piano style hinge that shall attach the cover to the body. e) One person on one side of the apparatus may perform opening of the cover and yet the cover shall be rigid enough to support weight without deformation.

2.5.33 Crosslay Flaps

a) Black vinyl flaps with elastic cords shall be provided on each end of the Crosslay cover. 2.5.34 Crosslay Rollers

a) Stainless steel rollers shall be provided at each end of the Crosslay hose bed to facilitate deployment of hose.

b) Vertical rollers shall be installed on each side of the hosebed opening, and a horizontal roller shall be installed under the opening.

2.5.35 Rear Wheel Wells

a) The fenders shall be integral with the body sides and compartments with a seamless appearance. b) The fenders shall be fitted with bolt in removable full circular inner-liners in the wheel well area for ease of cleaning and maintenance. c) There shall be sufficient clearance provided in the wheel wells to allow the use of tire chains when the apparatus is fully loaded.

2.5.36 Rear Fenderettes

a) Two (2) aluminum fenderettes shall be installed at the outboard edge of the rear wheel well area, one on each side.

Page 39 of 64



PS05032



VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

b) The fenderettes shall be bolted to the apparatus body using nylon washers to space them slightly away from the body to reduce build-up of road grime. c) The fenderettes shall be constructed of aluminum that has been polished to a high quality finish. 2.5.37 Mudflaps

a) Four (4) mudflaps shall be installed on the apparatus, two at the front and two at the rear. b) The mudflaps shall be a minimum of ½” thick to prevent “sailing”.

2.5.38 Body Rubrails

a) Rubrails shall be installed to protect the body from damage should the body be brushed or rubbed against another object. b) The rubrails shall be fabricated of highly polished bright dipped anodised 1 ½” x 3/8” aluminum stock.c) The rubrails shall be installed away from the body utilising 5/8”, non-corrosive nylon spacers and secured with aluminum bolts and the ends shall be angled toward the body.

2.5.39 Handrails, Grab Rails and Steps

a) Handrails shall be stainless steel tubing not less than 1-1/4” in diameter covered with ribbed rubber grips.

b) All railing escutcheons and brackets shall be stainless steel or chrome, and bolted with stainless steel bolts.

c) The lower bracket on all vertical handrails shall have a drain hole drilled in it at the lowest point. d) All other steps where required to be open Grip Strut type.e) Handrails shall be provided in the following areas: i. Grab handle on top of catwalk on the left side of the apparatus in front of the tank fill tower. ii. Grab handle on top of catwalk on the right side of the apparatus. iii. Vertical handrail on right back rear to access steps.

iv. Vertical handrail on left back rear to access steps.

v. Horizontal handrail on left pump panel. vi. Horizontal handrail on right pump panel.

2.5.40 Air Bottle Compartments

a) There shall be four (4) single 6” sized cylinder air bottle compartments installed in the rear wheel well areas.

b) The tubes shall be rubber lined on the bottom half to reduce damage to the air cylinders.

Page 40 of 64



PS05032



VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

c) There shall be a drain hole in the rear of the compartment as well as rubber padding where the cylinder comes in contact with the back wall and shall have a Cast Products hinged door with an o-ring gasket.

2.5.41 Fuel Fill

a) The fuel fill pocket shall be located in the left rear wheel area. b) The fuel fill shall have a Cast Products aluminum door with bezel.

2.5.42 Two Rear Tow Eyes

a) There shall be two (2) chrome plated tow eyes at the installed at the rear of the apparatus, above the rear step area. b) The tow eyes shall be bolted to a heavy-duty assembly that is welded to the torque box. c) Each tow eye shall have a 2 ½” ID hole.

2.5.43 Wheel Chocks

a) Two (2) wheel chocks that meet the requirements of SAE # J -348, shall be provided with the apparatus.b) They shall be mounted in aluminum brackets at a location decided by the VF&RS at the pre construction meeting.

2.5.44 Fire Pump module

2.5.45 Fire Pump Mounting

a) The fire pump shall be mounted within a separate body module that is not directly connected to the apparatus body.

b) This module shall be mounted to the frame in four locations and in such a manner as to reduce the likelihood of a collision causing the pump casing to crack.

c) The point where the pump module is mounted to the frame shall be reinforced appropriately to carry the expected load for the life of the apparatus. d) The plumbing as well as the pump shall be integral with the pump module as much as possible to facilitate the changing of the chassis should the apparatus be involved in a collision. e) Chassis frame mounted fire pumps shall not be acceptable.

2.5.46 Enclosed pump controls

a) The pump panel shall be located on the left front side of the pump module with a totally enclosed with roll up door.b) The roll up doors shall be Robinson Roll up door brand.

Page 41 of 64



PS05032



VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

2.5.47 Pump Panel Surfaces

a) The control panel, instrument panel, and right side pump panel shall be coated with a thermoplastic material for maximum resistance to abrasion and to minimize glare.

b) The material shall be capable of withstanding the effects of extreme temperatures and weather.

2.5.48 Pump Panel

a) The left side of the pump enclosure shall be divided into two sections. b) The lower section shall be where:c) The 6” steamer port (intake) is located. d) The 3 ½” auxiliary intake valve is located. e) The Class A and Class B foam control head, foam instructions, foam tank selector valve, dual foam external pickups are located. f) The main pump drain valve is located. g) Akron model 44 pressure and vacuum test ports shall be located.h) A ULC approved test plate to be installed on the lower left, bottom of the control panel. i) The water tank level indicator is installed. j) A non-restricted air chuck fitting, supplied from the auxiliary air tank with ½” air line tubing is installed. k) This surface shall be referred to as the “control panel”.

2.5.49 Instrument Panel

a) The surface above the control panel shall contain all instruments, gauges, test fittings, and other controls, this area will be referred to as the “instrument panel”.

b) The instrument/gauge panel shall be independent, vertically hinged, swing out style and with a thumb pull latch so that it may be opened to provide access for servicing. c) All instruments, gauges, and other equipment shall be installed with sufficient slack in any cabling, tubing, or plumbing to allow the panel to swivel to the fully open position.

2.5.50 Gauges

a) There shall be one (1) Class1, 4 ½” Intake (compound) gauge and one (1) Class1 4 ½” pressure gauge. b) Each gauge shall have dual readout capabilities, 0-700 PSI or 0-4900 kPa, and shall be LED backlit. c) All gauges shall have a white face with black numbers and lettering. d) The apparatus shall be equipped with a Class1 Flowminder Value System on nine (9) discharge lines. e) All Flowminders on the vehicle shall show total flow in US gallons and or Litres per minute. f) The Flowminder Value System shall consist of:

Page 42 of 64



PS05032



VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

g) A colour coded bezel with digital display and mechanical pressure gauge on the pump panel. h) The flow display shall be weatherproof with super-bright digits at least ½” high. i) Each discharge pressure display shall be liquid filled, mechanical gauge with Sub Z freeze protection. j) Five (5) 2 ½” gauges shall have dual readout capabilities, 0 – 400 PSI or 100 – 2750 kPa and shall be LED backlit. k) Two (2) 3 ½” gauges shall have dual readout capabilities, 0 – 400 PSI or 100 – 2750 kPa and shall be LED backlit. l) Two (2) 3 ½” gauges shall have dual readout capabilities, 0 – 700 PSI or 100 – 4900 kPa and shall be LED backlit. m) A flow transmitter mounted in each discharge line piping between the pump and the discharge outlet, consisting of a weather resistant black composite housing and a stainless steel durable paddle wheel.

n) A set of connecting cables to connect the digital display to the flow transmitter and to the apparatus power.

o) Machined mounting hardware to hold the transmitter in the correct position in the discharge line shall be provided and placed in strict accordance with the Class1 mounting requirements. p) All flowmeters shall be checked and calibrated prior to delivery of the apparatus. q) All gauges must be visible and accessible to one (1) person in the operator’s controls panel location. r) A Class1 “Intelli Tank” LED water tank level gauge shall be installed. s) A Class1 “Intelli Tank” LED Class A foam cell level gauge shall be installed. t) A Class1 “Intelli Tank” LED Class B foam cell level gauge shall be installed.

2.5.51 Controls

a) All controls must be visible and accessible to one (1) person in the operator’s controls panel location. b) All manual controls are to be of heavy-duty metal construction. c) All intake and discharge controls are to be colouring coded as per NFPA 1901 and numbered. d) An air horn signal button shall be supplied at pump panel. e) There shall be a warning alarm and light for low oil pressure and high water temperature. f) A Class1 model 34BV valve shall be provided on the pump panel, to control pump cooling and labelled as “PUMP COOLING”.g) A Class1 model 34BV valve shall be provided on the pump panel, to control engine cooling and labelled as “ENGINE COOLING.h) There shall be an hour meter provided that is activated only when the fire pump has been engaged.

2.5.52 Pump Panel Lights

Page 43 of 64



PS05032



VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

a) The pump operator’s control panel and the right side pump panel shall each be illuminated by two (2) Whelen strip light model # PSCACCR, compartment light, Level 3 strip lighting. b) The pump panel lights shall become energized upon setting the parking brake so the gauge information provided may be consulted at any time the apparatus is parked. c) A stainless steel shield shall be installed over the pump panel lights to further protect them from the elements and to act as a reflector for additional illumination. 2.5.53 Panel Right Side

a) The panel shall be installed on the right side of the pump module. b) The right side discharges, 6” steamer (inlet), shall be on this side.

c) The right side 2 ½” discharges shall be on this side

d) This panel shall be fully removable for pump and plumbing access without the need to use hand tools. e) Any electrical equipment that may be installed shall be equipped with connectors so they may be easily separated from the opening created when the front access panel is removed.

2.6 PUMP & ACCESSORIES

2.6.1 Fire Pump

a) The fire pump is to meet all the latest ULC standards and NFPA 1901 – 2003 edition requirements for a 1875 IGPM rated pump.b) The fire pump shall be a Waterous CMYU 1875 IGPM (7000 litres/min), midship mounted, two stage centrifugal, ULC class “A” rated, fire pump.c) The fire pump shall be capable of producing over 1875 IGPM at 165 PSI and 600 GPM at 600 PSI from a draft and designed to mount on the chassis rails of a custom built truck. d) The fire pump shall be tested and certified, by an independent third party testing company, to perform as listed below:

i. 100% of rated capacity at 150 pounds net pressure.

ii. 70% of rated capacity at 200 pounds net pressure.

iii. 50% of rated capacity at 250 pounds net pressure.

iv. 100% of rated capacity at 165 pounds net pressure.v. 50% of rated capacity at 600 pounds net pressure.

e) The entire pump shall be fully tested the pump manufacturer’s performance specs as outlined by this document and the requirements of NFPA 1901 – 2003.

Page 44 of 64



PS05032



VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

f) The entire pump, both suctions, discharge passages, both intakes and discharge valves and all plumbing shall be hydrostatically tested to a pressure of 800 PSI.

g) The pump shall be driven by the driveline from the truck transmission. h) The fire pump shall be free from objectionable pulsation and vibrations. i) The pump body and related parts shall be of high tensile, close-grained gray alloy cast iron, with a minimum tensile strength of 40,000 PSI. j) All metal moving parts in contact with water shall be of high quality bronze or stainless steel. k) The pump shall have two impellers and be of series-parallel, two-stage design.

l) Pump body shall be horizontally split in two sections for easy removal of entire impeller assembly including wear rings and bearings from beneath the pump without disturbing piping or the mounting of the pump in chassis.

m) The pump shaft shall have only one (1) spring loaded, and maintenance free and self-adjusting mechanical seal in place of pump packing required on the inlet side of the pump. n) Mechanical seal construction shall be a carbon sealing ring, stainless steel coil spring, Viton rubber cup, and carbide seat with Teflon® backup seal. o) The pump shall be equipped with replaceable bronze wear rings. p) The pump shaft must be sealed with double-lip oil seal to keep road dirt and water out of gearbox.

2.6.2 Transfer valve

a) The pump shall be equipped with an all bronze transfer valve, incorporating a hydraulically balanced seal.

b) The transfer valve shall operate smoothly without sticking, even when it is exposed to sandy or dirty water.

c) An electric actuator controlled by a switch on the pump operator’s panel shall operate the transfer valve. d) The transfer valve shall be equipped with a positive mechanical indicator to register the position of the transfer valve at all times. e) The power transfer valve shall be equipped with a manual override and not be electrically operated.

f) There shall be two (2) indicator lights to show when the pump is operating in pressure or volume mode.

g) The transfer valve shall be assessable for ease of maintenance or replacement.

2.6.3 Transfer Case

a) The pump transmission shall be a high strength unit capable of handling the maximum torque developed by the engine.b) The pump and transmission shall be easily separable, a two piece shaft shall be splined, allowing for individual repair of either the pump or transmission.

Page 45 of 64



PS05032



VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

c) The transfer case shafts shall be made from alloy steel forging, hardened and ground to size. d) Deep groove, anti-friction ball bearings shall be used throughout the transfer case. e) A free sliding collar that uses an internal locking mechanism to insure that the collar will stay in road or pump position shall accomplish the pump shift engagement. f) All drive line components shall have a torque rating equal to or greater than the final net engine torque.

g) Lubrication for the pump transmission bearings, sprockets and chain shall be provided by a splash system.

h) The pump ratio shall be selected by the pump manufacturer to give maximum performance with the engine and transmission selected.

2.6.4 Pump Shift

a) The pump shift actuating mechanism shall be air operated by the air system on the truck from a valve in the cab identified as “PUMP SHIFT”, that locks in road or pump. b) Full instructions for shifting the pump shall be inscribed on the valve plate on the pump panel. c) A manual override for the pump shift shall be supplied.d) Controls for the override shall be located at the lower right hand corner of the pump panel. e) Full instructions shall be inscribed on a plate near the pump shift controls. f) There shall be two (2) green pump system shift indicator lights in the chassis cab. g) The first light shall become energized when the chassis parking brake has been set and the pump has completed its shift into pump gear and shall be labelled “Pump Engaged”. h) The second light shall become energized and when the pump and the chassis transmissions have been shifted completely into the correct gears for pumping, this light shall be labelled “OK to Pump”. i) There shall be one (1) green pump system shift indicator light located on the operator’s panel. j) This light shall only become engaged when the chassis parking brake has been set, and when the pump and the chassis transmissions have been completely shifted into the correct gears. k) The light shall be located adjacent to the Fire Control and shall be labelled “Warning: Do Not Open Throttle Unless Light Is On”. l) An additional interlock be provided that prevents the pump from being taken out of “pump “ position if neutral on the transmission has not been selected m) The pump shift should be clearly marked with suitable protection provided so that it cannot accidentally be jarred or moved, out of the set position.

2.6.5 Priming Pump

Page 46 of 64



PS05032



VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

a) An environmentally safe, oil-less, 12 volt, rotary vane type, priming pump system that meets the requirements of NFPA 1901 – 2003 edition shall be supplied and will mounted in a location to be determined at the pre construction meeting by the VF&RS.

b) There shall be one priming control that shall start both the priming pump and open the priming valve. c) The priming pump is to be controlled with a weather proof push button switch located on the pump operator’s control panel with an indicator light on the pump panel to show when the primer is operating.

d) The pump shall be capable of creating a suction of 22 “ at an altitude of 1000 feet (300M) and discharging water from a lift of 10 feet (3M) through 20 feet (6M) of appropriate sized suction hose in less that 45 seconds.

2.6.6 Thermal Protection

a) The pump shall be equipped with a thermal protection device that monitors the water temperature of the pump and automatically relieves water when the temperature inside the pump exceeds 120 F (49 C), it shall relieve water back into the water tank and not on to the ground.b) There shall be an indicator light on the pump panel to indicate the fire pump is overheating.

2.6.7 Anode Protection

a) There shall be two (2) or more sacrificial anodes installed in the pump.

2.6.8 Slow Close Mechanisms

a) Discharges that are 3” or larger shall be equipped with a valve mechanism to prevent changing the position of the valve from full open to full close, or full close to full open, in less than 3 seconds as required by NFPA 1901 – 2003 edition.

2.6.9 Pump Drain Valve

a) There shall be a manifold style drain valve assembly provided, with a capability to drain the entire pump by pulling or twisting a single control. b) The valve assembly shall consist of a stainless steel plunger in a bronze body with multiple ports. c) The drain valve controls shall be mounted on the left side pump panel and identified as “Pump Drain”.

2.6.10 Intakes

a) There shall be one (1) 6”NST gated male intake valve on the left side and one (1) 6” NST gated male intake valve on right side of apparatus. b) All intake valves shall be butterfly style electrically operated from a solid-state controllers located on the pump panel.

Page 47 of 64



PS05032



VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

c) The pump panel controllers shall have seven (7) LED position indicator lights, that will indicate when the valve is open, closed or in a throttled position.

d) All electrically operated valves shall have a permanently mounted, easily accessible manual control.

e) All intake valves shall have a built in pilot operated 75 to 250 PSI. adjustable pressure relief valve. f) The pressure relief valve shall provide overpressure protection for the suction (intake) hose even when the intake valve is closed and limit the pressure rise to a maximum of 30 PSI. g) The pilot valve for the relief valve to be mounted inside the left side pump panel, assessable to the operator. h) The pressure relief valves provided should be factory set to 135 PSI and field adjustable from 75 to 250 PSI. and come with a ¾” manual drain valve and an automatic air bleeder. i) The outlet of the pressure relief valves shall direct the excess flow through 2 ½” flexible piping away from the operator’s position, and the pipe end marked with a permanent “DO NOT CAP” label.

j) To accommodate the intake valves without exceeding the legal overall body width, shorter adapters shall be installed on the both sides of the apparatus.

k) The centre line of the suction tube to be positioned not more than 4’-0” (1.2 metre) above ground. l) There shall be two (2) Redhead E60 6” female NST long handle X 5” male NST 30 degree adapter(s) for the steamer inlets supplied with the apparatus.

2.6.11 Left side 3 ½” Gated Intake

a) There shall be one (1) Akron 8835, 3 ½” gated intake provided on the left side of the pump panel. b) The intake shall be a 3 ½” full-flow valve with a manual rotary actuator and supplied by 3 ½” galvinized steel plumbing. c) The intake shall be supplied with a 3 ½” NSFH female chrome swivel. d) A hard coated anodized aluminum 3 ½” male NSFH to 2 ½” BCT female adapter will be supplied with the apparatus. e) A 2 ½” chrome plated BCT cap shall be supplied and attached to the bezel by means of a chain. f) The 3 ½” Intake is to be positioned as low as possible, but above the running board.

2.6.12 Rear 5” Intake

a) There shall be one (1) 5” gated intake valve with a 5” NH female swivel provided on the right side, rear of the main body, piped direct to the pump with 5” pipe. b) The intake shall be a 5” electric butterfly valve mounted at the fire pump with electric controls located at the pump panel and a manual control located to the left of the intake.

c) This intake to come with a 1 ½”, ¼ turn stainless steel manual drain valve and a have air bleeder installed.

Page 48 of 64



PS05032



VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

d) Seven (7) lights will indicate when the valve is open, closed or in a throttled position.

e) The rear intake to be positioned as low as possible.

f) There shall be an intake relief valve installed on the suction side of the pump, this valve shall be adjustable from 75 to 250 PSI, pre set at the factory to 125 psi and shall be designed to prevent vibration from altering the setting, g) The control for this valve shall be mounted behind the pump panel but with easy access for the operator.

h) The relief valve’s outlet shall be directed below the valve with the discharge terminating in a 2 ½” male BCT connection and marked with a “DO NOT CAP” label.

2.6.13 Intake Drains

a) Each gated intake shall be equipped with a Class1 ¾” quarter turn bleeder valve. b) The bleeder valve shall be equipped with a chrome-plated handle to provide a positive grip while personnel are wearing gloves.

2.6.14 Intake Strainers

a) Removable stainless steel strainers shall be provided with each gated intake.

2.6.15 Intake Trimplates

a) Each gated intake shall have a polished cast aluminum plate around the intake valve and fitting. b) The trimplate shall be easily removable without the need to disturb the valve.

2.6.16 Right Side 5” Large Diameter Discharge

a) There shall be one (1) 5” male NST discharge located on the right side pump panel. b) The 5” discharge shall be plumbed with one (1) 3 ½” Waterous electric rotary actuator and 4” galvinized steel plumbing. c) The 3 ½” valve will have an electric motor, which opens and closes the valve by means of a switch mounted on the operator control panel. d) Seven (7) lights will indicate when the valve is open, closed or in a throttled position. e) There shall be one (1) Redhead 5” female NST X 5”male NST 30 degree, chrome plated, elbow adapter with lug style chrome plated cap shall be supplied with the apparatus.

2.6.17 Right Side 2 ½” Discharges

a) There shall be two (2) 2 ½” male BCT discharges on the right side pump panel. b) Each discharge shall be plumbed with a 2 ½” Waterous full flow valve and supplied by 2 ½” schedule 80 galvinized steel plumbing.

Page 49 of 64



PS05032



VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

c) The 2 ½” valves will each have electric motors, which open and close the valves by means of switches mounted on the operator control panel. d) Seven (7) lights will indicate when the valve is open, closed or in a throttled position.

e) There shall be two (2) blue coloured 30 degree elbow adapters, 2 ½” NST x 2 ½” BCT and come with two (2) 2 ½” BCT chrome caps and chain secured to the apparatus.

2.6.18 Rear 2 ½” Discharge

a) There shall be one (1) 2 ½” male discharge on the left rear of the pump body. b) The discharge shall be supplied with a 2 ½” Waterous full flow valve and supplied by 3” schedule 80 galvanized steel plumbing. c) The 2 ½” Waterous valve will be controlled by an electric motor which will open the valve by means of switches mounted on the operator control panel. d) Seven (7) lights will indicate when the valve is open or in a throttled position.d) There shall be one (1) 2 ½” NST x 2 ½” BCT chrome adapter(s) provided.

2.6.19 1 ½” Trash Line

a) There shall be one (1) 2 ½” Waterous full flow electric rotary actuated valve supplying a 2 ½” flex line (min. 500 psi burst pressure) to front bumper to supply a 1 ½” trash line through a 2 ½” 90 degree Chicksan swivel and c/w an automatic drain. b) The 2 ½” Waterous valve shall be controlled by push/pull locking “T” handle control, mounted on the left control panel. c) There shall one (1) 2 ½” BCT x 1 ½” NPSH chrome adapter provided on the trashline.

2.6.20 1 ¾” Crosslays

a) There shall be two (2) 1 ¾” Crosslays, over the pump compartment.

b) Each Crosslay shall be supplied with 2 ½” Waterous electric valves and plumbed with 2 ” schedule 80 galvinized steel piping and shall have 2 ” 90 degree “Chicksan”, elbow type swivels on each discharge.

c) Each Crosslay hose bed shall have a minimum capacity of 200’ of double jacket 1 ¾” fire hose, have a minimum cross section of approximately 21”H x 7”W x 72”L. and have DURA-DEK flooring installed on the Crosslay hose beds for ventilation and drainage. d) The dividers between the hose areas shall be fabricated of 3/16” marine grade aluminum and mounted in a channel on each end. e) The 2 ½” valves will each have electric motors which open and close the valves by means of switches mounted on the operator control panel.f) Seven (7) lights will indicate when the valve is open or in a throttled position.

Page 50 of 64



PS05032



VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

2.6.21 2 ½” Crosslays

a) There shall be two (2) 2 ½” Crosslays, forward of the pump compartment, over the pump compartment. b) The Crosslays shall be plumbed with two (2) 2 ½” Waterous full flow valves and supplied with 2 ½” schedule 80 galvinized steel pipe from the pump discharge and shall have 2 ½”, 90 degree “Chicksan”, elbow type swivels on each discharge. c) The 2 ½” valves will each have electric motors which open and close the valves by means of switchess mounted on the operator control panel.d) Seven (7) lights will indicate when the valve is open or in a throttled position.

e) There shall be two (2) 2 ½” NST x 2 ½” BCT chrome adapter(s) provided, one (1) on each 2 ½” Crosslay.

f) The hose beds shall have a capacity of 200 feet of 2 ½” double jacket, rubber lined fire hose and there shall be DURA-DEK flooring installed on the Crosslay hose beds for ventilation and drainage.g) The dividers between the hose areas shall be fabricated of 3/16” marine grade aluminum and mounted in a channel on each end.

2.6.22 Monitor Piping

a) There shall be one (1) 3 ½” galvinized steel riser for a deluge monitor installed above the pump on the apparatus.

b) The riser pipe shall be installed with a 3 ½” Waterous full flow electric rotary actuated discharge valve.

c) The 3 ½” Waterous full flow valve will be controlled by an electric rotary actuator, which opens and closes the valve by means of a switch mounted on the control panel.

d) Seven (7) lights will indicate when the valve is open, closed or in a throttled position.

2.6.23 AKRON Electric Monitor and Nozzle

a) There shall be one (1) Akron style 3440 remote controlled monitor with a style XXX SaberMaster 1250 nozzle installed on the apparatus. b) The 1250 gpm rated monitor shall be an all electric single waterway monitor with automated elevating capability. c) The monitor shall have fully enclosed 12 volt motors and gears with manual override for horizontal, vertical, and elevation rotation. d) Each manual override shall have a non-captive crank with a clip bracket on the monitor for storage. e) The monitor shall not to exceed 17” high, 16 3.4 “ wide, and 17” deep in the stowed position. f) The centre of the waterway shall elevate to a height of 24” above the base of the flange. g) The outlet shall have a vertical rotation of 45° below horizontal to 90° above horizontal and 344° of horizontal rotation shall be achievable.

Page 51 of 64



PS05032



VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

h) The logic box shall include coated solid state components to resist water corrosion and include a set of DIP switches for built in options. i) The control box shall control the vertical and horizontal position of the monitor, along with the pattern of the nozzle. j) The control box shall have a single toggle switch with a guard that shall allow the monitor to be moved into the stowed or deployed position. k) One (1) set of Style 2499-stacked tips shall be provided.

l) One (1) Style 3488 stream shaper shall be provided.

2.6.24 Tank to Pump Valve and Tank Check Valve

a) The tank-to-pump valve shall a 3 ½” Waterous full flow discharge valve. b) The tank to pump valve shall be controlled by push/pull locking “T” handle controls, mounted on the left control panel. c) There shall be a full sized check valve to eliminate back flow into the water tank when the pump is connected to a pressurized source installed between the pump suction and the water tank valve.

2.6.25 Tank Fill Valve

a) A 3” ID tank fill line shall be provided from the discharge side of the pump fitted with an 3 ½” Waterous full flow electric rotary actuated valve to be controlled automatically.

2.6.26 Drain Valves

a) Each discharge 2 ½” or larger, with the exception of the Crosslays and hard to access plumbing shall be equipped with a ¾” quarter turn, Class1 drain between the valve and the discharge. b) A chrome-plated handle shall be provided on each drain valve to facilitate use with a gloved hand. c) Drain valves shall be located in a row just above the running board and below the pump panels. d) Each drain valve shall be colour coded to match the appropriate discharge.

e) The drain valves shall be connected to the individual valves, the drain lines shall be capable of withstanding the highest service pressure of the fire hose used on that discharge and routed in such a manner as to assure complete drainage, to clear areas below the apparatus.

f) The drains shall be located in areas that shall allow the entire line to drain effectively. g) More than one drain shall be used in lines that are uneven along their length. h) Where drain valves are located above the frame rails of the chassis, the outlets shall be extended with hose to below the chassis frame rails.

2.6.27 Booster Reel

Page 52 of 64



PS05032



VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

a) There shall be one (1) Hannay, aluminum fabricated electric booster reel, with a capacity of 200’ of 1 “ booster hose. b) The reel shall have a 1 ½”, ¼ turn Waterous ball valve, controlled from operator’s panel and piping connected with 1 ½” high pressure flexible hose. c) There shall be an automatic brake and an auxiliary manual rewind crank shall be supplied. d) The booster reel shall be equipped with vertical and horizontal hose guide rollers. e) The natural aluminum finish of the booster reel shall be left unpainted. f) The reel shall be located above the pump on the operators side. g) Three (3) 50’ x 1” section(s) of ReelTex booster hose coupled with 1” NST Pyrolite couplings shall be supplied.

h) One (1) valve stem shall be installed in the booster hose reel to allow air to be applied to the hose reel so water can be blown out of the hose during cold weather.

i) There shall be one (1) hose reel sealed push button switch installed, located on the left pump panel and a marked with a permanent label marked “Booster Rewind”.

2.6.28 Discharge Relief Valve

a) The discharge relief valve system shall be positive and quick acting, with instantaneous hydraulic lockout that does not require the operator to cancel out or disturb the pressure setting. b) With the pump operating from a hydrant and delivering its rated capacity at 150 psi, the increase in discharge pressure shall not exceed 20 psi, if lines are shut down quickly.

c) The relief valve control shall be protected from malfunction due to sand or other sediment in the water by a strainer, which may be removed, cleaned and replaced from the operator’s panel while the pump is operating.

d) Relief valve indicator lights shall be mounted on the panel adjacent to the pilot valve assembly.

e) The indicator lights shall be Amber, marked Open to indicate the relief valve is bypassing and Green, marked Closed to indicate the relief valve is fully closed.

2.6.29 Intake and Discharge Plumbing

a) All plumbing, valves and accessories shall be accessible for maintenance and routed to conserve on space but not overly restrict water flow. b) All plumbing shall be schedule 80 galvinized steel. c) All plumbing, valves and accessories shall be tested to and capable of pressures of over 800 psi. d) All valves shall be clearly identified as to their operation. e) Electric actuator type valves – unless otherwise stated, shall be controlled by OPEN/CLOSE switches and seven (7) position indicator lights, plus override capability and controlled from the pump panel.

Page 53 of 64



PS05032



VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

f) All discharges not designated as pre-connects or speedlays shall have a chrome cap, secured to the body by a suitable chain. g) All threads to VF&RS standards (see attached thread specification).

2.6.30 Discharge Trimplates

a) Each gated discharge shall have a polished cast aluminum plate around the discharge valve and fitting. b) The trimplate shall be easily removable without the need to disturb the valve.

2.6.31 Pump Cooler Line

a) There shall be one (1) Class1 model 34BV valve and ½” pump recirculating line from the pump to the booster tank on operators panel; this will be labelled “Pump Cooler On/Off”. b) There shall be a check valve installed in the pump cooler line to prevent tank water from back flowing into the pump when it is not in use.

2.6.32 Pump Lubrication

a) Grease zerk(s) shall be installed connected to the chassis lubrication system by tubing.

2.6.33 Water Tank

a) The Water Tank shall be constructed of ½” thick polypropylene sheet stock, stress relieved thermoplastic, natural in colour, and UV stabilized for maximum protection.

b) The water tank shall have a capacity of 500 IG and be designed of a specific configuration to be completely independent of the body and compartments.

c) All joints and seams shall be nitrogen welded and tested for maximum strength and integrity. d) The tank shall be fitted with removable lifting eyes designed with a 3 to 1 safety factor and to be removed easily.

e) Certification of the tank capacity shall be recorded on the manufacturer’s record of construction and shall be provided to the purchaser upon delivery of the apparatus.

f) The tank shall be designed and positioned to allow storage for the 5” hose and maximum compartment depth.

g) The tank is to be mounted to the chassis with a galvanized cradle and to provide for easy removal in case of repairs and to prevent twisting of the water tank by the body or chassis.

2.6.34 Water Level Gauge

a) The apparatus shall be equipped with one (1) Class1 “ Intelli-Tank “ Level Gauge.

Page 54 of 64



PS05032



VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

b) The Tank Level Gauge shall indicate the liquid level on an easy to read LED display and show increments of 1/8 of a tank. c) The tank level gauge system shall include:d) A pressure transducer that is mounted on the outside of the tank in an easily accessible area. e) A super bright LED 4-light display with a visual indication at nine accurate levels. f) A set of weather resistant connectors to connect to the digital display, to the pressure transducer and to the apparatus power.

2.6.35 Tank Baffles

a) The transverse swash partitions shall be manufactured of 3/8” polypropylene and extend from approximately 4” off the floor to just under the cover. b) The longitudinal swash partitions shall be manufactured of 3/8” polypropylene and extend to the floor of the tank through the cover to allow for positive welding and maximum integrity. c) All partitions shall be equipped with vent and air holes to permit movement of air and water between compartments. d) All partitions shall be designed to provide maximum water flow and shall interlock and be welded to each other as well as to the walls of the tank. e) There shall be three (3) lateral supports inside booster tank to secure tank top.

2.6.36 Tank Sump

a) There shall be one (1) sump in the bottom of the water tank, constructed of ½” polypropylene and shall be located in the left front quarter of the tank. b) The sump shall be used as a combination clean out and drain and have an anti-swirl plate located approximately 2” above the sump to prevent air from being entrained in the water while pumping.

2.6.37 Tank Drain Valve

a) One (1) stainless steel 1 ½”, ¼ turn steel drain valve shall be provided under the tank sump. b) The valve shall have a locking lever to prevent accidental draining of the tank.

2.6.38 Tank Lid

a) The tank lid shall be constructed of ½” thick polypropylene. b) The tank lid shall be recessed 3/8” from the top of the tank and shall be welded to both sides and longitudinal partitions. c) The lid shall have hold downs consisting of 2” polypropylene dowels spaced a maximum of 30” apart, extending through the cover and a minimum of two lifting dowels shall be drilled and tapped ½” x 13” to accommodate lifting eyes.

Page 55 of 64



PS05032



VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

2.6.39 Water Tank Fill Tower

a) The tank shall have a combination vent and manual fill tower, marked “Water Fill.” constructed of ½” polypropylene and shall be a minimum dimension of 8” x 8” at the outer perimeter. b) The tower shall be located for ease of filling in the left front corner of the tank and have a ¼” thick removable polypropylene screen and a polypropylene hinged-type cover with a large filler cap provided that is to be capable of sealing to prevent spillage. c) There shall be a large 4” ID schedule 40 polypropylene overflow/air vent pipe installed in the fill tower and extended through the tank and to dump excess water to the rear of the rear axle. d) All tank fill couplings shall be backed with flow deflectors to break up the stream of water entering the tank, and shall be capable of withstanding sustained fill rates of up to 1,000 GPM.

2.6.40 Class A Foam Cell

a) There shall be one (1) 30 IG polypropylene foam cell built into the water tank. b) There shall be one (1) zero pressure/vacuum vent installed on the foam tank. c) There shall be a reinforced 1” NPT supply and a ¾”NPT reinforced drain holes supplied.

d) The drain shall have a brass or stainless steel ¼ turn valve installed inside the pump module and it shall drain through a clear hose to below the frame rail of the chassis.

2.6.41 Class B Foam Cell

a) There shall be one (1) 20 IG polypropylene foam cell built into the water tank. b) There shall be one (1) zero pressure/vacuum vent installed on the foam tank. c) There shall be a reinforced 1” NPT supply and a ¾”NPT reinforced drain holes supplied.

d) The drain shall have a brass or stainless steel ¼ turn valve installed inside the pump module and it shall drain through a clear hose to below the frame rail of the chassis.

2.6.42 Foam Tank Level Gauges

a) Each foam tank shall be equipped with a Class1 “ Intelli-Tank “ Level Gauge for indicating foam level. b) The Tank Level Gauge shall indicate the liquid level on an easy to read LED display and show increments of 1/8 of a tank. c) Each tank level gauge system shall include:d) A pressure transducer that is mounted on the outside of the tank in an easily accessible area. e) A super bright LED 4-light display with a visual indication at nine accurate levels. f) A set of weather resistant connectors to connect to the digital display, to the pressure transducer and to the apparatus power.

Page 56 of 64



PS05032



VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

2.6.43 Tank Mounting

a) The Water Tank shall rest on the body cross members in conjunction with such additional cross members, as required by the tank manufacturer. b) The tank shall be isolated from the cross members through the use of hard rubber strips. c) The tank shall be supported around the entire perimeter and captured front and rear as well as side-to-side to prevent the tank from shifting during vehicle operation. d) The tank shall be designed as free floating; it shall be required for the tank to have adequate hold-downs to minimize movement during vehicle operation. e) The tank shall be completely removable without disturbing or dismantling the apparatus body.

2.6.44 Foam System

a) The apparatus shall be equipped with a Hypro FoamPro 2002D fully automatic, variable speed, direct injection, discharge side, and foam proportioning system.

b) The system shall be capable of handling Class A foam concentrates and most Class B foam concentrates and rated to flow a minimum of 1000 GPM.

c) The foam proportioning operation shall be based on direct measurement of water flows, and remain consistent within the specified flows and pressures. d) The system shall be capable of delivering accuracy to within 3% of calibrated settings over the advertised operation range when installed according to factory standards.

e) The system shall be equipped with a digital electronic control display, installed on the left pump panel.

f) Within the control display shall be a microprocessor that receives input from the system flowmeters, while also monitoring foam concentrate pump output, comparing values to ensure that the operator pre-set proportional amount of foam concentrate is injected into the discharge side of the fire pump.

g) A paddlewheel type flowmeter shall be installed in the manifold specified for foam capable discharges. h) The digital computer control display shall enable the pump operator to perform the following control and operation functions for the foam proportioning system: i. Provide push-button control of foam proportioning rates from 0.1% to 9.9% in 0.1% increments. ii. Show current flow-per-minute of water. iii. Show total volume of water discharged during and after foam operations are completed. iv. Show total amount of foam concentrate consumed.

v. Simulate flow rates for manual operation. vi. Perform set-up and diagnostic functions for the computer control microprocessor. vii. Flash a low concentrate warning when the foam concentrate tank(s) run(s) low.

Page 57 of 64



PS05032



VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

viii. Flash a no concentrate warning and shut the foam concentrate pump off, preventing damage to the pump, should the foam tank(s) empty.

i) A 12 volt electric driven, positive displacement foam concentrate pump, rated up to 5.0 GPM, with operating pressures up to 400 PSI, shall be installed in a suitable compartment near the apparatus pump module.

j) The system will draw a maximum of 56 AMPS at 12Volt DC.

k) A pump motor electronic driver shall power the ¾ (0.56Kw) horsepower electric motor that is directly coupled to the concentrate pump in a variable speed duty cycle to ensure that the correct proportion of concentrate pre-set by the pump operator is injected into the water stream.

l) System Capacity shall be as follows:

Foam Concentrate Maximum Water Flow GPM (LPM)0.2% 2500 (9450) 0.5% 1000 (3785) 1.0% 500 (1895)3.0% 166 (625)

m) A manual dual tank valve system capable of operating pressures to 500 psi shall provide manual switchover of dual foam concentrate tanks from the operator panel position. n) The dual tank valve handle shall also have a flush position between the dual tank settings. o) The flush position shall provide a clean water flush of the foam concentrate pump preventing foam concentrates from mixing and possible gelling. p) The system shall automatically read the low tank sensor for whichever foam tank is in use. q) A full flow check valve shall be provided to prevent foam contamination of fire pump and water tank or water contamination of foam tank. r) Components of the complete proportioning system as described above shall include: i. Operator control and display. ii. Paddlewheel flowmeter. iii. Pump and electric motor/motor driven. iv. Wiring harnesses. v. Two (2) low level tank switches. vi. Multiple Multi-Flo electronic module vii. Manual dual tank valve. viii. Foam injection check valve. ix. External foam pickups.s) The foam system shall be plumbed to the following discharges:

i. One (1) Deck Gun. ii. One (1) 1 ½” front bumper trashline iii. Four (4) Crosslay discharges iv. One (1) rear 2 ½” rear discharge

Page 58 of 64



PS05032



VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

v. One 1” Booster Line

2.6.45 Class A & B Foam Transfer system

a) The apparatus shall be equipped with two (2) Foam Transfer systems. b) There shall be one (1) system for Class A foam concentrate, and one (1) system for Class B foam concentrate. c) Each foam transfer pump shall be capable of supplying 3.5 gallons per minute at an 8 foot lift. d) Each pump shall have a thermally sealed 12 volt motor, constructed of a composite material, a Buna-N rubber impeller and a stainless steel pump shaft. e) The two (2) systems shall each come with an automatic tank shutoff switch.

f) There shall be two (2) pump panel mounted, positive seal, quick connect, suction connections provided, one (1) for Class A foam and one (1) for Class B foam.

g) A five (5) foot suction hose with strainer shall also be provided for each system. h) The system for the class B foam shall include a flush to clean the system of foam.

2.7 Compressed Air Foam System

2.7.1 Air Compressor

a) The air compressor shall be an oil-flooded, rotary screw type, sized to supply a minimum of 200 CFM of free air at minimum of 125 P.S.I.G. b) The air compressor shall be capable of maintaining prolonged pressures from 100 to 175 P.S.I.G. throughout its service life. c) The air compressor shall be encapsulated within its own sump/pressure vessel constructed and stamped (175 P.S.I.G. working pressure) in accordance with the requirements of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Sec. VIII, Div. 1. d) The sump/pressure vessel shall have an oil level indicator, air pressure relief valve and threaded fill cap and drain plug.

2.7.2 Pneumatic Modulating Inlet Valve

a) A pneumatic modulating inlet valve mounted on the air end inlet shall control the air compressor. b) This controller shall sense air pressure and control the air delivery of the air end while maintaining constant pressure.

2.7.3 Auto Sync Balancing System

a) An Auto Sync balancing system shall be provided to automatically maintain the air pressure within plus or minus 5% of the water pump pressure, throughout the pressure range. b) Auto Sync controls shall be installed on the pump operator’s panel with the following modes:

Page 59 of 64



PS05032



VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

c) AUTOMATIC – Air pressure matched to water pressure. d) FIXED – Air pressure defaults to manual setting on compressor mounted control valve. e) UNLOAD – Air pressure reduced to 40 P.S.I.G. for standby operations. f) RUN – Air compressor in run operation. Air pressure determined by AUTO or FIXED setting.

2.7.4 Air Distribution Manifold

a) The air compressor shall be equipped with an integrated air distribution manifold. The air manifold shall provide the following:b) Six (6) ½” electrically controlled solenoid valves. c) One (1) ¾” electrically controlled solenoid valve. d) One (1) ¾” auxiliary outlet.

2.7.5 Air Compressor Drive

a) The air compressor shall be driven by the fire pump split-shaft transmission utilizing a synchronous drive with a pneumatic activated “hot shift” clutch. b) There shall be a high-speed clutch with high coefficient facings and shielded bearings. c) The compressor drive train shall include a means to adjust the tension of the synchronous drive.

d) The air compressor drive system shall be designed to operate the air end at rated capacity when the fire pump is developing 130 to 140 P.S.I.G. in a “no flow” state.

2.7.6 Air Compressor Oil System

a) The air compressor system shall feature a spin-on, full-flow oil filter unit and a thermostatic valve to control oil flow to the cooler. b) The thermostat valve shall maintain the system oil temperature within 160F to 225F. c) A modular air/oil separator unit with spin-on element shall be provided with the sump tank.d) Replacement elements for the oil filter and separator shall be readily available.

e) All oil lines shall be routed in braided hose conforming to SAE 100R1 standards for hydraulic hose.

f) A low oil level warning system shall be provided to warn the operator should the sump oil level fall below a predetermined level. g) Warning shall be a red LED and audible alarm; both located on the Auto Sync panel.

2.7.7 Air Compressor Cooling System

a) The apparatus fire pump, utilizing an all copper and brass shell and tube heat exchanger shall cool the air compressor. b) Water shall flow through the heat exchanger whenever the fire pump is operating.

Page 60 of 64



PS05032



VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

c) An in-line strainer that is removable for cleaning shall be provided on the water inlet side of the heat exchanger to prevent clogging. d) The compressor cooling system shall be capable of maintaining recommended operating temperatures throughout its full operating range at ambient temperatures up to 115 F.

2.7.8 Air Controls and Instruments

a) The following shall be provided on the pump operator’s panel, arranged in a logical and operator friendly manner:b) Air compressor clutch engagement switch with “ON” indicator light. c) Auto Sync compressor controls (Auto/Manual, Run/Unload) with engraved instruction plate. d) Air compressor temperature gauge with warning light and audible alarm. e) CAF system air pressure gauge. f) Digital airflow meter (SCFM).

g) An “ON/OFF” air supply switch for each compressed air foam discharge (controls to be adjacent to and colour coded with respective water valves)

2.7.9 Foam Manifold

a) The foam manifold shall be capable of flowing a minimum of 1000 GPM. b) The foam manifold shall be a fully integrated assembly with foam injector port, flow meter mount and a high-flow, low-loss, spring-assisted check valve to prevent back-flow of foam concentrate or foam solution into the pump.

2.7.10 Foam Discharges

a) All foam discharges shall be equipped with brass or stainless steel check valves on the water/solution plumbing to isolate the individual discharges and prevent back-flow of air or CAF into the pump or neighbouring discharges.

2.7.11 Compressed Air Discharges

a) All compressed air discharges shall be equipped with brass or stainless steel check valve at the air injection points to prevent back-flow of foam solution into the air lines.

2.7.12 Static Mixer

a) A static mixer of all stainless steel construction shall be incorporated into the plumbing of the master stream discharge for optimal foam quality.

2.7.13 Foam Concentrate Proportioning System

Page 61 of 64



PS05032



VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

a) There shall be a fully automatic electronic direct injection foam proportioning system furnished and installed on the apparatus.

b) The proportioning system shall meet the requirements of NFPA standards for foam proportioning systems and the design shall have passed testing against SAE automotive reliability standards appropriate for the application.

c) The foam system shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer recommendations.

2.8 PAINT PROCESS

2.8.1 Main Body and Pump Module Paint Process

a) a) The Cab shall be painted two (2) tone with the break line 1 ½” below the cab side windows and down to the top of the grill on the front fascia.

b) b) After the body and components have been fabricated and assembled they shall then be disassembled prior to painting so when the apparatus is completed there shall be finish paint beneath the removable components.

c) c) The apparatus body and components shall be metal finished to provide a superior substrate for painting.

d) d) All aluminum sections of the body shall undergo a thorough cleaning process followed by a complete rinse and a chemical conversion coating applied to seal the metal substrate.e) e) The body and its components shall be primed with an epoxy primer and the seams shall be caulked.f) f) All bright metal fittings, if not available in stainless steel or polished aluminum, shall be heavily chrome plated. g) g) Iron fittings shall be copper under-plated prior to chrome plating.h) h) The body shall go through a three (3) stage paint process, following the standards as set forth by PPG Fleet Finish Guidelines.i) i) Primer coat.j) j) Base coat.k) k) Clear coat. l) l) A minimum of two (2) to three (3) coats of paint shall be applied to achieve hiding. m) m) In the final stage of the paint process the body shall be painted with PPG DCU-2002 Clear Coat up to a minimum of two (2) to three (3) coats shall be applied to achieve a total dry film thickness of 2-3 mills.n) n) The painted body shall go through a baking process to achieve a complete coating cure on the finished product.o) o) The coated surface shall be sanded using 1000, 1200, and or 1500 grit sandpaper to remove surface defects.

p) p) The surface shall be buffed with 3m Super-duty compounds to add extra shine to coated surface; no more than .5 mil of clear coat shall be removed in this process.

Page 62 of 64



PS05032



VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

2.8.3 Apparatus Body Paint Colour

a) The apparatus shall be painted with PPG polyurethane enamel paint PPG# DBHS – 71096-ALT- Red. b) The apparatus shall be painted with PPG polyurethane enamel paint PPG# DUHS –2185- white.c) One (1) four ounce bottle of acrylic enamel touch-up paint shall be supplied.

2.8.4 NFPA Compliant Reflective Striping

a) Reflective striping shall be applied to the exterior of the apparatus in a manner consistent with NFPA 1901 – 2003 or latest edition. b) The reflective striping shall be 3M Scotchlite Diamond Grade and white in colour. c) It shall consist of a 1”, 4”, and a 1” wide stripe low across the front of the chassis and along the sides up to the first compartment on each side. d) It shall then angle up and back to a point above the wheel well area where it shall then run level to the back edge of the body. e) There shall be a 1” gap provided between each of the stripes. f) A 6” wide stripe shall be applied across the rear of the apparatus

2.8.5 Reflective Lettering

a) There shall be eighteen (18) gold reflective letters provided and installed on the front cab doors, the letters shall be approximately 4” tall with black outline and shadow, that read VANCOUVER and over a 14” VF&RS decal, that will be supplied by VF&RS.b) There shall be fourteen (14) gold reflective letters provided and installed on the on rear cab doors, the letters shall be approximately 4” tall with black outline and shadow that read ENGINE X, X will be determined, later in production. c) There shall be fourteen (14) white reflective, provided and installed on the centre of the front bumper and on the rear flexible vinyl hose bed flap, the letters shall be approximately 6” tall with black outline and shadow that read ENGINE X, where X will be determined, later in production.d) There shall be fourteen (14) white reflective letters painted on to an aluminum plates that are installed on to the left and right side of the cab roof, the letters shall be approximately 6” tall with black outline and shadow that read ENGINE X, where X will be determined, later in production.

e) There shall be twenty four (24) gold reflective letters provided and installed on the installed on the rear rollup door, the letters shall be approximately 4” tall with black outline and shadow that read “Keep Back 150 metres” and ENGINE X, in 4” white reflective lettering on black shading.

2.8.6 Undercoating

Page 63 of 64



PS05032



VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

a) The apparatus shall undergo a two (2) step undercoating process.

b) The first step shall be a rubberized polyurethane base compound, applied after the body has been primed.

c) The materials used shall incorporate unused paint products to reduce the amount of waste released into the environment. d) This coat shall be applied to all hidden pockets and surfaces that shall not be visible after completion. e) The entire underside of the body shall be coated with a bituminous-based automotive type undercoating when the apparatus is completed. f) Care shall be taken to avoid spraying the product on airlines, cables, or other items that would cause normal maintenance to be hindered

Page 64 of 64


Supply and Delivery of Fire ApparatusAir and Light Units

PS05032


3.0 Detailed Equipment Specifications and Compliance Matrix3.1 CAB & COMPONENTS

Air and Light Unit

3.1.1 Cab

a) The cab shall be aluminum bodied, medium four door, with a 10” raised roof and flat floor, fully enclosed tilt cab with an open interior and seating for five (5) fire fighters.

b) The cab shall be specifically designed for the fire fighting service.c) The cab shall be painted two tone with a finished break line 1.5” below the cab side windows and down to the top of the grill on the cab front fascia. d) The cab construction shall have extruded box sections that provide maximum strength for safety.

e) The rear cab wall shall be .090” thick aluminum and the cab front skin and floor shall be .190” thick aluminum.

f) The cab design shall be tested to the standard ECE regulation – 29 test. g) Low profile cabs will not be accepted.

3.1.2 Cab Fascia

a) The front cab fascia shall have provisions for four (Hi/Low Beam) headlamps, turn signal lamps and four warning lamps.

b) The front fascia shall allow access to check and fill the engine oil, power steering fluid and wiper washer fluid and provide access for servicing the windshield wiper motor and linkage, and electrical bulkhead connectors.

c) All engine fluid levels must be easily checked and filled without raising cab.

3.1.3 Cab Doors

a) The cab doors shall have flush, hidden, stainless steel door hinges. b) All doors shall be equipped with push button type with exterior latch locks that are designed to prevent accidental lockouts. c) All cab door locks shall be keyed a like. d) The interior door latches shall be flush, paddle type, incorporated into an upper door panel.e) The one-piece inner door panel shall be texture painted with Zolotone in place of the standard vacuum formed upper and aluminum treadplate lower.f) The lower cab door panels shall have 60 % of the surface covered with NFPA compliant reflective material and have a flashing warning LED light installed in each door panel. 3.1.4 Steps



VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

Page 1 of 55



PS05032

Proponents- do not write in this section Proponent to indicate whether they meet or exceed specification. Explain in detail.

VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO


3.1.5 Trim Band



a) Four (4) 18” three piece assist handles shall be installed, one (1) behind each cab door.


a) A one (1) piece, polished stainless steel front bumper shall be provided. b) The bumper shall be a 12” high, two (2) rib, wrap-around style.

c) A 3/16” bright aluminum tread plate apron shall be installed between the bumper and the face of the cab.


a) Dual electric horns and Grover Stuttertone 24” air horns shall be supplied, recessed in the front bumper. b) 3/8” air supply lines, set equal distance from each horn shall be installed. c) The electric and or air horn actuation shall be accomplished by using the existing driver’s steering wheel contacts or a sealed push button switch on the pump panel or right side officer’s push button switch.

3.1.9 Fog Lights

a) Two (2) clear rectangular fog/driving lamps shall be installed in the front bumper.3.1.10 Backup Alarm and Disable Switch

a) An ECCO #575 backup alarm shall be installed at the rear of the chassis with an output level of not less than 107 dB. b) The alarm will automatically activate when the transmission is placed in reverse. c) An audible alarm shall be wired to the open door light, which will sound when a door is open, and the air brake is off with the vehicle in gear. d) There shall be a back-up alarm disable switch installed in the cab dash within reach of the driver. e) The backup alarm, disconnect switch will automatically reset to sound the next time the transmission is placed in reverse.

3.1.11 Tow Eyes

a) Two chrome plated tow eyes shall be installed below the bumper.

Page 2 of 55



PS05032


VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

b) The eyes shall be fabricated from ¾” thick hot rolled steel.c) The inside diameter of the eye shall be 2.00” and have a chamfered edge.


a) All vehicle lighting to meet the latest BC Motor Vehicle Act and Canadian Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Act requirements, the requirements of NFPA 1901 – 2003 edition and the ULC standards at time of delivery.

3.1.13 Headlights


3.1.14 Cab Lights

a) Five (5) approved Light Emitting Diode (LED) cab marker lamps shall be installed on the Top front face of the cab above the windshield. 3.1.15 Turn Signals

a) Whelen model 60A00TAR amber LED programmable turn signals shall be mounted in polished cast 6EFLANGE brackets above the warning lamps.


a) Two (2) Whelen 400J000CR steady on cornering lamps with clear lenses, mounted in 4EFLANGE brackets shall be provided above the lower zone A red lights on the corners of the bumper.

3.1.17 Scene Lights

a) There shall be two Whelen 900 series clear lights installed on the cab, mounted in 5EFLANGE brackets. b) Two (2) lights shall be located on each side upper cab and each controlled by separate switches.

c) There shall be four (4) 27 degree, Whelen 70J000CR Optiscene lights installed on the main body, mounted in 7EFLANGE brackets. d) Two (2) lights shall be located on each side upper body.e) These scene lights shall become illuminated after the parking brake is engaged and on the side that a cab door is opened or after a switch on the main dash panel is turned on. 3.1.18 Air Compressor Compartment Lights

a) There shall be four (4) light(s) installed in the compressor compartment. b) An automatic switch shall activate the lights.

Page 3 of 55



PS05032


VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO


a) There shall be two (2) Whelen model 70A000TAR LED turn signal lights, in 7EFLANGE brackets installed in the rear wheel well area, one on each side of the body.


a) Weldon model 9185-40003 lights shall be mounted in a manner that illuminates all walkways and steps for safe operation of the apparatus. b) These lights shall become illuminated when the parking brake is engaged and after a dedicated switch on the main dash panel is turned on.

3.1.21 Tail, Turn Signal and Brake Lights

a) There shall be two (2) Whelen 600 series LED tail light assemblies installed on the rear of the apparatus.

b) Two (2) red 60J000R LED tail lights, two (2) amber 60TAR LED turn lights, and two (2) red 60R00XRR LED brake lights shall be supplied, the lights shall be mounted in a cast 3 housing, one on each side of the apparatus.

3.1.22 Rear LED Clearance and License Plate Lights

a) Three (3) PAR 16 – T0R00FRR LED clearance lights shall be installed on the rear of the body.

b) One (1) arrow #437 chrome plated license plate light shall be installed on the lower rear corner of the apparatus.


a) There shall be one (1) Whelen model TAM870 “LED” Traffic Advisor installed on the apparatus. b) The traffic advisor shall be mounted on or above the rear face of the body above the rear compartment. c) A controller for the Traffic Advisor shall be supplied and installed in the cab, in easy reach of the driver. d) The Traffic Advisor shall be wired into the emergency light package and to be activated with the Zone C upper lights, in a flash pattern.


a) A Whelen PAR00XRR LED brake/tail light shall be installed as an auxiliary brake light. b) The light shall be installed as high as possible at the rear of the body, wired into the brake light circuit.


a) Two (2) Whelen 810 series work lights shall be installed as high as possible at the rear of the body, above the tail light bezel and wired to come on with the back up lights.b) The switch shall be installed on the left rear face of the main body activate the work lights. c) The rear work light circuit shall be deactivated when the park brake is disengaged.

Page 4 of 55



PS05032


VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO


a) Weldon model 9185-40003 lights shall be installed beneath the apparatus in areas where personnel may be expected to climb on and off of the apparatus. b) The lights shall illuminate the ground within 30” of the apparatus and shall activate on the side that a cab door is opened.


a) The emergency warning light package shall meet or exceed the requirements for NFPA 1901 – 2003 edition.

b) All emergency lights shall be controlled through a colour touch pad display in the centre multiplex console, within easy reach of driver. c) A notice of compliance that the emergency light package meets NFPA 1901 – 2003 edition shall be delivered with the apparatus.

d) All clear LED lights are to deactivate when the parking brake is applied or in the “Blocking right of way mode”.


a) There shall be one (1) Whelen FN72QLED 72” long light bar installed on the forward section of the chassis cab roof. b) It shall be equipped with two (2) forward facing linear red LEDs, two (2) forward facing, linear, two (2) corner, forward facing, linear, red LEDs and two (2) side facing linear red LEDs . c) The light bar shall be equipped with red and clear lenses on the front and sides.


a) Four (4) approved Whelen model 60R00FRR, red LED warning lamps shall be installed on the front of the cab in polished chrome housings mounted above the headlamps.


a) There shall be one (1) approved Whelen model 900 series, red LED warning lamps shall be installed on the main body in polished chrome housings mounted above compartment doors.


a) There shall be two (2) Whelen 900 series red, wide angle warning lights installed on the cab front radius to act as intersection lights. b) There shall be two (2) Whelen model 60R00FRR LED lights with 6EFLANGE brackets installed, one located in the rear wheel well, one (1) each side. c) There shall be two (2) Whelen model 60R00FRR LED lights with 6EFLANGE brackets installed in the lower, mid-point warning zone.


Page 5 of 55



PS05032


VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

a) There shall be two (2) Whelen model B6RLRA1P red rotating beacons with amber LEDs installed high at the rear of the apparatus. b) The rotators shall have red lenses and the LED shall have amber lenses.b) The Traffic Advisor shall be wired into the emergency light package and to be activated with the Zone C upper lights.3.1.33 Lower Zone C Warning Lights

a) There shall be one (1) Whelen model 60R00FRR LED light with 6EFLANGE brackets installed on each side of the lower warning zone C in Cast 3 housings.




3.1.35 Mirrors

a) There shall be two (2) RETRAC Model 1171 H West Coast style mirrors provided. b) The full flat glass shall be heated, remotely controlled by switches on the dash.c) The mirrors shall be dual vision, motorized and heated with 7” x 16” mirrors and convex’s in the lower portion of the mirror heads.

d) The mirror heads shall be mounted on stainless steel bow swing away type arms mounted to the cab doors.

3.1.36 Glass

a) All cab glass except the front windshield or the drivers or officers door glass shall be dark automotive tint applied in the glass. b) All cab glass shall be installed at the same height as the windshields. c) Left and right windshield shall use the same interchangeable glass. d) The front and rear doors shall have a full roll down windows.


a) The entire cab shall tilt 45 degrees to allow for ease of maintenance.

b) A remote control unit on a 25-foot long cord shall control electric over hydraulic, cab tilt actuation lift pump.

c) The lift system shall have an ignition interlock and red lock down indicator lamp, which shall illuminate when holding the “down” switch to indicate safe road operation.

d) It shall be necessary to have the master battery switch “on” and the park brake set in order to tilt the cab.

e) Two (2) cab tilt cylinders shall be provided with a “velocity fuse” in each cylinder port.

Page 6 of 55



PS05032


VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

f) There shall be two (2) spring loaded hydraulic hold down hooks installed outboard of the frame for holding the cab securely to the frame.

g) Steel safety “Tube” shall be installed on the right side, cab lift cylinder to prevent accidental cab lowering.

h) The safety tube shall fall over the lift right side cylinder when the cab is in the “up” position and a cable release system shall also be provided to clear the safety tube from the lift cylinder when lowering the cab.


j) There shall be a manual, cab lift pump that is attached to the electric over hydraulic tilt pump provided.

k) It shall be mounted in an enclosed box, with an outside door and latch, on the right side of the completed body in such a place as to be usable after the body and all equipment have been installed. l) A receptacle shall be provided to plug in the remote control and cord installed in the right hand side of the front bumper.

3.1.38 Cab Interior

a) The Interior cab volume and arrangement will be assessed by the VF&RS for acceptable placement of electronic communication equipment consisting of but not limited to, one mobile radio, one Mobile Data Terminal and one cellular phone. b) The cab interior shall be designed for extreme duty with the ABS header and dash trim eliminated. c) The cover shall incorporate a latching electrical access cover and the cover shall incorporate the integral rocker switch console. d) The interior metal surfaces of the cab shall be finish painted the standard job colour.e) A low rise fixed type engine cover shall be an intergal part of the cab and made of aluminum. f) The exterior shall be painted with a Zolotone texture finish and the underside of the cover shall be heavily insulated with 1" multi-layer foam with a non-conductive Mylar backing and held in place with adhesive and aluminum pins and retention caps.g) The sides, roof and rear wall of the cab shall contain a blanket of 1” thick multi-layered additional insulation to improve air conditioning and/or heating as well as reducing road noise. h) A glove box with a hinged door shall be provided in front of the officer’s seat. i) The interior metal surfaces of the cab shall be painted the same colour as the lower exterior colour.j) The flooring shall be a non slip vinyl covered, foam backed multi-layered, black floor mat with sound deadener attached that meets the anti skid requirements of NFPA 1901 – 2003 edition.k) Two (2) coat hooks and four (4) helmet hooks shall be installed on the rear inside back wall.3.1.39 Interior Lighting

a) One (1) 7” red dome lamp with switch shall be mounted in the headliner of the cab front to the left of the officer seat.

Page 7 of 55



PS05032


VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

b) One (1) 7” clear dome lamp with switch shall be mounted in the headliner of the cab front to the left of the officer seat.c) Two (2) 7” red dome lamps and two (2) 7” clear dome lamps with switches shall be installed in the crew area headliner inboard of the outer rear facing seats, the 7” dome lamps shall be door switch activated in addition to the push button switch. d) Four (4) red/clear surface mount Whelen 50R03FRR LED flashing warning lights, each mounted in 5EFLANGEs with a 5BRUSH guard, one (1) shall be located in the moulded panel of each door and activated when the door is opened. e) Two (2) light modules with dual map lights shall be located in the headliner, over the Driver. f) A red flashing door ajar light Whelen 50R03FRR LED mounted in 5EFLANGEs and labelled “Do Not Move Apparatus” shall be centred in the headliner, wired to indicate an open door on the cab when the parking brake is released. g) An audible alarm shall be wired to the open door light, which will sound when a door is open, and the air brake is off with the vehicle in gear. 3.1.40 Dash & Instrument Panel

a) The dash shall be ergonomically designed so that all controls and gauges are in the centre of the dash and easily accessible to the driver and able to be tilted for maintenance. b) The instrument panel shall contain the following red backlit gauges and LED indicators, all within clear view of the driver.

i. One (1) electronic tachometer with integral digital hour meter. ii. One (1) electronic speedometer with digital metric odometer. iii. One (1) three (3) function gauge with front air pressure, rear air pressure and fuel level. iv. One (1) air application gauge. v. One ampere hour gauge. vi. One (1) four (4) function gauge with oil pressure, coolant temperature, transmission temperature and voltmeter.

c) The centre of the instrument panel shall contain a cluster of indicator lamps informing the driver of the following:

Red Lamps

i. Low air system one (1) primary and two (2) secondary.

ii. Low engine oil pressure. iii.High engine coolant temperature. iv. High transmission temperature. v. Low coolant level. vi.Air filter restriction. vii. Low fuel level to activate at ¼ full. viii. Stop engine. ix. High or low voltage. x. Parking brake set. Green Lamps

Page 8 of 55



PS05032


VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

i.Directional indicators. ii.Auxiliary braking device active. iii. Low traction. iv.High idle active. Yellow Lamps i.Check engine. ii.Check transmission. iii.ABS brakes. iv.Water in fuel Blue Lamp i) High beam headlight on.

Audible Warning System for the Following: i.Low air system. ii. Low engine oil pressure. iii.High engine coolant temperature. iv.Low coolant level. v.High transmission temperature. vi.High and low voltage. vii.Stop engine3.1.41 Main Dash Switch Panel

a) The main rocker switch panel shall include fourteen (14) red LED backlit, labelled rocker switches. b) All emergency lights shall have individual back lit heavy duty rocker style switches, in the centre of the console, within easy reach of driver, wired through a master switch within that panel.c) The single row of switches shall be installed in the centre of the electrical housing on a hinged panel that includes 4 rocker switches on driver’s dash for:

i.Secondary Braking On/Off switch. ii.Secondary Braking Variance Control – High/Low. iii.Spare. iv Spare

d) The high-idle switch shall be wired though interlocks to prevent its activation when the apparatus is in PTO, pump or road gear or if the parking brake is not engaged.

e) There shall be a rocker switch on the main dash panel that will isolate the electric horns from the air horns, labelled “city/road”. f) The system will include inside and outside ambient temperature monitoring and “Climate control”.

g) The left side of the panel shall contain a rocker type headlight switch with instrument lamp slide dimmer and intermittent windshield wiper/washer switch.

h) There shall be a back-up alarm disable switch installed in the cab dash within reach of the driver.i) The backup alarm, disconnect switch will automatically reset to sound the next time the transmission is placed in reverse.


a)

Intermittent electric wipers with a single motor and electric powered “wet arm” type windshield washers shall be provided. 3.1.43 Siren

Page 9 of 55



PS05032


VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

a) There shall be a Whelen 295 HFSQ1 surface mount 12-volt Control with noise cancelling microphone, installed in a location decided by VF&RS at a pre construction meeting. b) Siren control to be installed with a swivel base for easy access by driver and officer. c) A Whelen speaker model # SA122FMP2, shall be recessed in the front bumper on the driver’s side and to be easy removed for repair. d) The siren shall be highly RF immune.

e) The siren shall meet the requirements of CSA J-1849.

3.1.44 Sun visors




3.1.46 Map Light


3.1.47 Spot Light

a) A Collins Pulsar 500 hand-held spotlight with a momentary switch shall be supplied powered by a 12-volt supply, and shall be mounted to the right of centre of the engine tunnel. b) It shall have a coil-cord, a momentary switch and a 500,000 candlepower lamp.


a) The contractor will install the VF&RS supplied mobile radio and laptop mounting bracket in locations to be determined by the VF&RS at the pre delivery meeting.

b) The contractor shall install the VF&RS supplied radio, GPS and MDT antennas on the cab roof.

c) There shall be two (2) sets of circuit breaker protected wiring, each set with 12 volt power, 12 volt signal and ground wires installed for the MDT and radio.


a) One (1) Sigtronics US-67-S intercom system with five (5) plug-in modules, five (5) headsets and all necessary equipment for two-way radio access and monitoring shall be installed in the following areas:

i.One (1) only US-67-S master station mounted in front cab area. ii.Two (2) in the cab for the driver and officer. iii.Two (2) in the crew area. iv.One (1) at the rear of the body, left rear corner. b) All cables for installation will be Sigtronics cables.c) There shall be two (2) SE-2 SKPTT headsets c/w microphones supplied.

Page 10 of 55



PS05032


VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

d) There shall be three (3) SE-8 headsets c/w microphones supplied. e) There shall be two (2) Sigtronics portable radio adapters, suitable for Ericson “Jaguar” radios supplied.

3,50 12 Volt Power Supply

a) A 12-volt cigarette lighter type receptacle shall be provided in the cab dash on the officer’s side to act as a power source.

1.3.51 Map Console

a) There shall be a map console constructed of aluminum with a thermoplastic material finish installed in the chassis cab to be mounted in an area to be decided at the pre construction meeting. b) The console shall be approximately 9” tall, 13” wide and 10” deep. c) The console shall hold three (3) binders up to 2-1/2” thick each.

3.1.52 Seats Risers

a) The driver and officer seats shall have a raised aluminum box with a compartment built in, approximately 8.00” high x 16.25” wide x 17.38”. b) They should have a hinged doors and openings of approximately 6” high x 12.50” wide.

3.1.53 Drivers Seat

a) The driver seat shall be a 911 Seats Inc. model “ABTS” high back 6 way electric seat with a mechanical suspension and a tapered/padded seat cushion.

b) The seat back and bottoms shall be covered with an Imperial 1200 vinyl coated polyester material meeting SAE J - 833. c) This seat shall be equipped with a red, integrated 3-point shoulder harness, lap belt and an automatic retractor built into the seat assembly.3.1.54 Officers Seat

a) The driver seat shall be a 911 Seats Inc. model “ABTS” high back, 6 way electric seat, with a mechanical suspension and a tapered/padded seat cushion.

b) The seat back and bottom shall be covered with Imperial 1200 vinyl coated polyester material, meeting SAE J - 833.c) This seat shall be equipped with a red, integrated 3-point shoulder harness, lap belt and an automatic retractor built into the seat assembly.

3.1.55 Outboard rear facing Seat

a) There shall be one (1) outboard rear facing 911 Seats Inc. “ABTS” high back seat on the left side of the cab with a mechanical suspension and tapered/padded seat cushion.

b) The seat back and bottom shall be covered with Imperial 1200 vinyl coated polyester material, meeting SAE J - 833.

Page 11 of 55



PS05032


VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

c) This seat shall be equipped with a red, integrated 3-point shoulder harness, lap belt and an automatic retractor built into the seat assembly.

3.1.56 Forward facing Seats

a) There shall be two (2) centre forward facing 911 Seats Inc. “ABTS” high back seats with a mechanical suspension and tapered/padded seat cushions.b) The seat back and bottom shall be covered with Imperial 1200 vinyl coated polyester material, meeting SAE J - 833. c) This seat shall be equipped with a red, integrated 3-point shoulder harness, lap belt and an automatic retractor built into the seat assembly. d) The two (2) centre forward facing seats shall be installed on a 42” wide aluminum riser mounted in the centre of the cab at the rear wall, the riser shall have hinged doors on each end.

3.1.57 EMS Compartment

a) There shall be an EMS compartment installed in the chassis cab, in place of the right rear facing seat and is 32” tall, 32” wide, and 16” deep and be constructed of 1/8” aluminum. b) There shall be one (1) adjustable shelf provided in the compartment.c) The compartment shall have a roll-up door provided on the outside front and inside rear. d) The exterior of the compartment shall be covered in thermoplastic, liner material. e) A compartment light activated by a switch on the roll-up door shall be provided in the upper section of the compartment. 3.1.58 Inner Assist Bars

a) Two (2) black powder coated cast aluminum assist bars shall be provided and installed on the inside of the rear crew doors the full width of the window glass.


3.1.59 HVAC System

a) A ceiling mounted HVAC system shall be provided consisting of a heater/defroster/air conditioning unit mounted in a central location with dash-mounted controls.

b) The condenser shall be roof mounted on the left side of the cab.

c) The HVAC system should include forward facing louvers for defrosting the windshield and rearward facing louvers to direct air at the crew, at the driver and officer.

d) The system should be able to produce 60,000 Btu’s of heat, 32,000 Btu’s of cooling and be capable of lowering the cab interior temperature from 100 degrees to 70 degrees within thirty minutes.


Page 12 of 55



PS05032


VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

a) A permanent plate shall be mounted in the driver’s compartment on the seat riser specifying the quantity and type of the following fluids that may be used in the apparatus for normal maintenance. b) Where a fluid is not applicable to the unit, the plate shall be marked N/A to inform the technician. c) The following fluids as a minimum shall be listed on that plate:

i.Engine oil. ii.Engine coolant. iii.Transmission fluid. iv.Drive axle fluid. v.Air-conditioning refrigerant. vi. Power steering fluid. vii.Cab tilt mechanism fluid. viii.Air compressor system lubricant. ix.Generator system lubricant. d) A permanent plate shall be affixed, in plain sight of the driver that states the maximum number of personnel allowed riding on the apparatus at any time. e) A permanent plate shall be affixed, in the rear cab seating area, in plain sight of the crew that states “ALL OCCUPANTS MUST BE SEATED AND BELTED WHEN THE APPARATUS IS IN MOTION.”f) A sign shall be affixed in the chassis cab, in plain sight of the driver that states the overall height of the apparatus. g) All other appropriate labels to ensure safe operation of the apparatus shall be permanently affixed in conspicuous locations. h) There shall be a placard on the rear face of the body, in clear sight from the ground, which reads, "WARNING - DO NOT RIDE ON STEPS OR DECK AREAS WHILE THE APPARATUS IS IN MOTION. DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY MAY RESULT". i) A permanent plate shall be installed in the Driver's compartment which indicates the following:

i. Filter Part Numbers for the Engine, Transmission, air and fuel systems. ii.Serial Number for the Engine and Transmission. iii. Delivered, certified weights of the front axle, rear axle and total completed weight. iv. Paint Code Brand and Codes. v.Body Builder Project Number.vi. A red “HAZARD” warning light shall be supplied and installed that if the park brake is not engaged it automatically illuminates to warn the operator that:vii. A passenger door is open. viii. An equipment rack is not stowed. ix. The light tower is extended.x. The light shall be mounted in plain view of the driver and labelled “DO NOT MOVE THE APPARATUS WHEN THE LIGHT IS ON”. xi. A label shall be provided where needed that states "Caution Hot Surface When Operating". xii. There shall be a label on the air fill station and air storage bottles that reads, "HIGH PRESSURE - 6,000 psi BREATHING AIR".

3.2 CHASSIS AND DRIVELINE COMPONENTS


Page 13 of 55



PS05032


VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

a) All added equipment to the stock chassis, such as transmission, PTO, etc. are to be mounted in such a way as to allow for removal of each component, without requiring the cutting out of chassis cross members or other body or chassis reinforcements.


a) The overall size, weight and manoeuvrability of the finished apparatus is critical to the VF&RS, Proponets shall submit an outline including: overall length, width, height, wheel base, turning radius, curb to curb, angle of approach & departure and all compartment sizes with their proposals . b) The weight of the miscellaneous equipment is to be evaluated by the Proponent and a GVWR and GAWR shall be provided to safely carry the fully equipped apparatus. c) Weight distribution shall not load the vehicle in such a manner as to exceed any individual axle rating, spring or spring hanger rating or tire and wheel rating. d) Axles are to carry the weight distribution as per S.A.E. Axle loading recommendations.e) Certified axle weights and fully loaded apparatus weight to be furnished with each apparatus. f) VF&RS would prefer:

i. Maximum axle loading 16,000 lb. (7,100 kg.) for the front axle. ii. Maximum axle loading 21,000 lb. (10,725 kg.) for the rear axle.3.2.3 Overall Length and wheel base of Completed Vehicle

a) The VF&RS desire to have the overall length of the vehicle be as short as possible, while providing space for the specified equipment, but not to exceed 385” (32’).

b) The overall wheel base of the vehicle shall be as short as possible, but not to exceed 200 “


a) The overall height of the vehicle shall be as low as possible, but not to exceed 130” ( 12’6”) when measured from the ground.

3.2.5 Front Axle

a) The front axle shall be an ArvinMeritor MFS –18 non-driving front steering axle with a 3.74” drop and a 71.00” KPI.

b) The capacity to be not less than 18,000 lb. GAWR.

c) The front axle cramp angle shall be at least 50 degrees to the left and a minimum of 44 degrees turning to the right, when using the 385/65R 22.5, 20 ply front tires.


a) The front axle wheel bearings shall be oil lubricated and the covers shall be Sentinel # STE – 348 4009 with an oil level visual inspection window.

Page 14 of 55



PS05032


VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

3.2.7 Front Springs

a) The springs shall be an elliptical type, with four (4) or more leafs, each 54” long, 4” wide with a military double wrapped front eye.

b) Both spring eyes shall have case hardened, threaded Horton bushings installed with lubrication counter bore and lubrication land off cross bore with grease fittings.

c) The spring capacity shall meet or exceed the capacity of the front axle.

3.2.8 Front Wheels

a) There shall be three (3) front ALCOA Dura-Bright polished aluminum, hub piloted 10 stud disc 22.5 x 9.00 wheels.b) They will come complete with bright nut covers and hubcaps.c) The wheels shall be rated at 18,000 lb. and for use with radial tires.

3.2.9 Front Tires

a) There shall be three (3) Goodyear 385/65R 22.5 20 ply “L” tubeless radial G286 highway tread. b) The tires shall be rated as a minimum at 20,000 lb. at 110lb. air pressure.

3.2.10 Front Shock Absorbers



a) The steering column shall be a seven (7)-position tilt and telescopic type.b) The steering wheel shall be a minimum 18” in diameter and covered with black absorbite padding. c) The steering wheel shall contain a horn button, self-cancelling turn signal switch, four-way hazard switch and the headlamp dimmer switch on turn lever.


a) The steering gear shall be a hydraulic power assisted, model TRW TAS-85 with a hydraulic, power assist cylinder. b) A Vickers hydraulic power steering pump shall be gear driven from the engine. c) The steering ratio shall be 23.3:1 and have 6.2 turns stop to stop.


a) The rear axle shall be an ArvinMeritor model RS – 24 – 160 single reduction gearing.b) It shall have a rated capacity as a minimum of 24,000 lb. GAWR.c) The rear axle shall have Traction Control with a “mud and Snow” feature installed.d) The rear axle ratio to provide for maximum road speed of 55 mph (90 km/h).

Page 15 of 55



PS05032


VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

e) The drive axles in the rear axle must be full floating and of sufficient size to transmit the full torque of the engine/transmission.

f) The rear axle shall have oil lubricated wheel bearings.


a) The rear suspension shall be an Aero Glide air suspension with a single air bag on a tapered forged drop leaf spring with adjustable torque rods, with a rated capacity as a minimum of 24,000 lb. GAWR.3.2.15 Rear Shock Absorbers


3.2.16 Rear Wheels

a) There shall be five (5) ALCOA Dura-Bright polished aluminum, hub piloted 10 stud disc 22.5 x 8.25 wheels with the correct outset.b) It shall be complete with bright nut covers and rear axle hub covers.c) The wheels shall be rated as a minimum at 24,000 lb. and for use with radial tires.

3.2.17 Rear Tires

a) There shall be five (5) rear tires shall be Goodyear 11R 22.5 16 PR “H” tubeless radial G164 traction tread.

b) The tires shall be rated as a minimum at 23,000 lb. at 110 psi. air pressure.

3.2.18 Drive Shafts

a) The drive shafts shall have model 1710 with “glide coat” splines on all slip shafts.

3.2.19 Brakes

a) The brake system shall meet as a minimum, the testing requirement setout in NFPA 1901 – 2003 edition and SAE J-992. b) A rapid air build up air brake meeting CMVSS – 121 system and in compliance with NFPA 1901 – 2003 edition shall be provided .c) It shall include air reservoirs with a total not less than 4,100 cubic inch capacity.d) The brake system shall be complete with:

i. Meritor Wabco anti-lock brake system on the front and rear axles. ii. An air compressor that does produces a minimum of 18.7 CFM of air. iii. A primary and secondary air tank, separate air tank pressure gauges and an air gauge to indicate service brake applied pressure. iv. Manual water drain valves for each tank drain and each with an external pull cord extended to outside of body with individual identification.

Page 16 of 55



PS05032


VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

v. A 1200 cu. in. air reservoir installed and isolated to act as a supply tank for operating air equipment, plumbed with a 90 psi pressure protection valve on the reservoir supply side, that will cut off air supply to all accessories when ignition switch is off. vi. Front axle brakes that are ArvinMeritor EX225H disc type brakes with 15” vented rotors providing a total of 120 sq. in. of braking area. vii. Rear brakes that shall be as a minimum ArvinMeritor 16.5" x 7" "S" cam type with Haldex automatic slack adjusters.viii. Air-operated spring brakes shall be fitted to rear axles to act as parking brake as well as emergency brake during low air pressure, with the controller mounted within easy reach of the driver and officer. 3.2.20 Auxiliary Brakes


3.2.21 Air Dryer

a) A model WABCO System Saver 1200 air dryer with a replaceable, spin on desiccant cartridge and automatic heated moisture ejector shall be installed with easy access for maintenance and draining.


a) A dual air system plumbed with colour coded, reinforced, nylon tubing airlines shall be installed.

b) The primary (rear) brake line shall be green, the secondary (front) brake line shall be red, the parking brake line, orange and the auxiliary outlet shall be blue.

c) Brass compression type fittings shall be used on the nylon tubing. d) All drop hoses shall be fibre reinforced neoprene covered hoses.


a) The air tanks shall be installed one (1) inch inboard of the frame rails. 3.2.24 Vogel Lubrication Systems

a) A Vogel, Lubrication system shall be installed on the chassis. b) The systems shall be capable of lubricating 22 grease points on the chassis.

3.2.25 Frame

a) The frame shall be made of heat treated, alloy steel, frame rails with inner liner and sufficient cross members to provide a strong torsion resistant frame assembly.

b) All cross members to be bolted to main rails, bolting to take place through web section of main rails.c) Frame rail spacing shall be 34” outside, North American Standard.

Page 17 of 55



PS05032


VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

d) The frame side rails shall be a channel type with a minimum dimensions of 10 ¼” x 3 ½” x 3/8”. e) The frame material shall have yield strength of not less than 110,000 psi. f) There shall be a minimum of seven (7) fully reinforced bolted in cross members installed, the bolts will be a grade 8 or better.

g) The frame and running gear of the chassis shall painted with a standard black paint. The frame paint shall be applied before airlines and electrical wiring is installed.

h) There shall be a lifetime warranty on frame and cross members.


a) On Spot automatic tire chains shall be installed on the rear axle of the chassis.b) The system shall include a switch on the dash with protective cover.

3.3 ENGINE, TRANSMISSION & ACCESSORIES

3.3.1 Engine

a) An in-line six (6) cylinder, 4 cycle, turbocharged, charge air cooled engine diesel engine with 370 horsepower @ 1900 to 2200 rpm, a torque of 1200 ft. lb. @ 1300 rpm and with the latest version of electronic control unit provided. b) The Electronic Speed Control shall be equipped with Electronic Controls to maintain a stable cycle output for generator. c) The governor shall be activated only after the vehicle’s parking brake is applied and the transmission selector is placed in neutral.

d) Engine lubrication to be 100% full pressure with two (2) full flow oil filters, one (1) primary full flow, and one (1) secondary full flow, both filters shall be spin on style.

e) The Crankcase pan is to be shaped to allow for operation on grades up to 20%.

3.2.2 Engine Brake

a) A engine compression brake, for the six (6) cylinder engine, with brake light actuation and cutout relay when in pump mode shall be installed.b) Dash mounted "On/Off" and High/Medium/Low switches shall be installed.c) The engine brake will activate upon release of accelerator when in operation mode and work in conjunction with the transmission downshift schedule to increase the auxiliary braking systems performance. d) The chassis brake lights shall activate when the compression brake is actuated and when the on/off switch for the compression brake is “On”.

e) The WABCO anti lock brake system shall be interfaced with the engine brake and transmission in such a manner that if there is an ABS event, the anti lock brake system assumes authority/priority and discontinues the secondary braking system until the ABS event is finished.

Page 18 of 55



PS05032


VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

f) There shall be an interlock system provided that is complete with a pump cut-out relay that activates when the fire pump is placed into pump mode.

3.3.3 Automatic Engine Alarm

a) An automatic engine alarm for low oil pressure and or high coolant temperature with audible alarm shall be installed at driver and pump panel. b) Alarm to be audible above engine noise.


a) An air intake flapper valve shall be mounted between the turbocharger intake and the air cleaner, a reset lever shall be provided on the flapper assembly that shall be accessible without tilting the cab.

b) Two (2) emergency shut down controls are required one (1) at the air compressor panel and one (1) in the cab.

3.3.5 Starter

a) A heavy-duty 12 volt electric starter shall be supplied, as per the requirements of NFPA 1901 – 2003 edition.

3.3.6 Alternator

a) A Leece Neville 270 amp, 12 volt alternator or VF&RS approved equal shall be provided.b) The alternator shall supply a minimum of 100 amps at engine idle. c) Alternator shall have a dual, ½” V belt drive or equal installed to provide power transfer with no belt slippage at full power demand.

d) A heavy-duty, remote mounted, transistorised voltage regulator shall be supplied and installed in a cool location.

3.3.7 Drain plugs




b) The radiator shall be located below the charge air cooler to allow a single depth core and efficient cooling system designed to maintain cooling during all fire fighting conditions, with a minimum 1200 sq. in. frontal surface area. c) The radiator shall have a complete de-aeration system capable of removing entrapped air from the system and equipped with a drain cock to drain the coolant for serviceability.d) The cooling system shall be equipped with a separate expansion tank that allows the system to be filled and will include a low coolant probe and a sight glass to monitor the coolant level.

Page 19 of 55



PS05032


VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

e) The cooling system shall have a “Fully Formulated Antifreeze” installed as per the engine manufacturer’s specifications and Supplemental Coolant Additive as a backup to the Fully Formulated Antifreeze if required.f) Silicone radiator and heater hoses with stainless steel constant torque clamps shall be used though out the cooling system. g) A low engine coolant indicator light and alarm shall be provided. h) The cooling system shall have sufficient capacity to keep the engine properly cooled under all conditions of driving or pumping operations.i)

The cooling system shall be designed to meet or exceed the engine and or transmission manufacturer and EPA requirements.3.3.9 Charge Air Cooler

a) There shall be a charge air cooler of a cross-flow design constructed completely of aluminum with welded side tanks. b) The charge air cooler shall be located above the radiator to allow a single depth core and efficient cooling system. c) The charge air system shall be installed with silicone hoses with stainless steel “T” style clamps.

3.3.10 Cooling System Fan

a) The engine cooling system shall incorporate a thermostatically controlled heavy-duty fan with an emergency override control, installed on the engine.b) A recirculation shroud shall be installed to ensure that the air is not drawn through it again.


a) The exhaust system shall be installed to discharge below frame rails on passenger side away from pump panel control station. b) Exhaust shall be 5” diameter pipe and exit at a 90-degree angle on the horizontal in front of the right rear duals. c) Stainless steel flex tubing is to be installed between exhaust pipe and muffler.d) The system joints shall be connected with lapping band clamps. e) The exhaust system shall accept a Neiderman 45 degree exhaust extraction system.


a) A primary fuel filter, Facet electric fuel primer pump shall be provided and be activated by a fuel primer momentary switch located on a panel under the dash.

b) A check valve and by-pass system shall be installed for normal draw of fuel for the engine fuel pump.

c) A 10-micron, spin on secondary fuel filter or a manufacturer approved equal shall be provided. d) A fuel shut off valve shall be installed in the fuel draw line at the primary fuel filter to allow the fuel filter to be changed without loss of fuel to the fuel pump, fuel filters located for easy access.

Page 20 of 55



PS05032


VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

3.3.13 Fuel Tank

a) The fuel tank shall have a capacity of fifty (50) IG’s and be made of a minimum of 12 gauge-coated steel with an epoxy exterior finish. b) The fuel tank shall be mounted under the frame, behind the rear axle on strap style hangers bolted at the front and rear. c) The tank shall have a vent port to facilitate rapid filling without “blow-back” and have a roll over check ball with separate vent. d) There shall be a removable access plate in the main body to allow the fuel sender to be removed. e) A 2” NPT fill ports on the left side of the tank shall be installed and available for left hand fill. f) A ½” NPT drain plug shall be installed centred in the bottom of the tank. g)

Steel wire braid reinforced rubber supply and return hoses with reusable fittings shall be installed between the fuel tank and engine.3.3.16 Air Filter

a) The air cleaner shall be a Farr # 62891-001 dry type with a replaceable element.b) The air cleaner shall have an outside air intake with an ember separator filter and an air restriction warning indicator light in the instrument cluster to show when the air cleaner element requires replacement.

c) An air restriction indicator gauge will be mounted on the dash panel; it shall provide a graduated scale/colour coded warning indication of a clogged air filter.

d) Air pickup for the air cleaner to be external from engine compartment and positioned not to pick up rainwater or road splash water.

3.3.17 Transmission

a) The transmission shall be an Allison 5 speed automatic transmission, model 3000 EVS. b) The transmission is to have openings for two (2) gear driven, 10-bolt PTO pads, one (1) at the 8-o'clock position and the other at the 1 o'clock position. c) There shall be an Allison, pressure sensitive, range selector, touch pad provided, located on the engine compartment, on the right side of the driver, in clear view and easy reach. d) The transmission shall be programmed with a “mode” function for fourth gear hold-in.e) The transmission, upon start-up, will select four (4) speed operation, by pressing the "mode" switch on the shift pad (mode on) provides five (5) speed overdrive. f) The transmission shall be filled with transynd synthetic fluid.

g) The transmission shall have two (2) internal oil filters.

h) The transmission shall be equipped with an air to oil transmission cooler located below the radiator allowing a single depth core and efficient cooling package.

i) The transmission cooler shall be mounted in a manner to allow maximum approach angle by not protruding below the frame more than an inch.

Page 21 of 55



PS05032


VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

j) The transmission cooler shall be constructed completely of aluminum with welded side tanks. 3.3.18 Power Take Off

a) There shall be a ten (10) bolt "Hot Shift" power-take-off (PTO) installed on the transmission PTO opening of the chassis.b) The PTO ratio shall be Chelsea 277 series with a ratio of 129%.c) The "Hot Shift" PTO is provided to allow the engagement of the PTO at higher engine RPM speeds. d) The PTO output shall be connected to the generator through hollow tube type driveline with heavy-duty universal joints. e) The engagement of the PTO shall be in the chassis cab with a rocker switch and red pilot light to indicate engagement of the PTO. f) The power supply to the PTO engagement control shall be wired to the parking brake and a neutral position transmission switch to prevent engagement unless the vehicle is stopped and transmission has been placed in neutral.

3.3.19 Fuel Management System

a) There shall be a fuel management unit install in a location to be determined.

b) The wiring drop out for this system shall consist of:

i. One (1) 14 gauge 12 volt power. ii. One (1) 14 gauge 12 Vbatt signal. iii. One (1) 14 gauge ground. iv. One (1) speed pulse signal.

3.4 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS


a) A single 12 volt, starting system shall be installed per NFPA 1901 – 2003.b) The starting system shall be supplied with the following:

i. One (1) Cole-Hersee # 2484 master battery switch. ii. One (1) Cole-Hersee # EX26654A ignition switch c/w keyless ignition and starter button. iii. One (1) starter button. iv. One green LED indicator for battery “on”. v. One green LED indicator for ignition “on”.

3.4.2 Batteries

a) There shall be six (6) DELCO BCI-31 950 CCA maintenance free 12-volt batteries with minimum 210-minute reserve capacity, suppressed as per SAE J-551.

b) The batteries shall be mounted so that the batteries can be checked. c) 3/0 welding type dual path, heavy-duty battery cables with soldered type cable ends, as per SAE J-541 shall be used.

Page 22 of 55



PS05032


VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

d) Battery boxes are to be covered with a stainless steel cover and lined on the bottom with anti-acid coating and having drain holes for washing the trays out.



3.4.4 Battery Charger and Conditioner

a) One (1) Kussmaul Auto Charge Model # 35/10, 35 amp battery charger and 10 amp battery conditioner shall be installed in the cab, behind the driver’s seat. b) The battery charger shall incorporate a 10 amp Battery Saver with a battery saver filter to provide a clean filtered 12 volt power supply for a mobile data terminal, radio and rechargeable hand held lights. c) The battery charger and conditioner shall be supplied power by a 120 volt shoreline, connected to a 120 volt/20 amp receptacle, Hubbell - HBL6331CN, with a spring loaded snap cover, located on the cab corner in front of the driver’s door. d) The battery charger shall have a switch for selection of an operational voltage selection.e) When in the AC position it shall operate from the shoreline.f) The remote charge indicator shall be located in the cab on the left side of the dash and shall be viewed through the bottom of the left windshield.


a) The main electrical panel shall be located in a highly weather resistant box. b) The panel shall contain a board with permanent sockets for relays, diode blocks, and using automatic reset circuit breakers. c) Three harnesses shall feed the main electrical panel, one for the cab, one for the pump compartment and one for the main harness from the body. d) The main body harness shall be connected to individual compartment harnesses and shall have a minimum of 10 spare wires, complete from on the end of the harness to the other.

e) All 12 volt wiring running from the front to the rear of the apparatus shall be run in a full length electrical wiring raceway that is down both sides of the apparatus.

f) An apparatus wiring panel, constructed of aluminum with an abraded finish shall be installed on the officer side bulkhead, below the dash and shall include a minimum of ten (10) spare circuits:

i. One (1) 30 amp. ii. Three (3) 20 amp. iii. Three (3) 15 amp. iv. Three (3) 15 amp relays and breakers with trigger wires to the rocker switch panel. g) All bulkhead connectors shall be physically attached to the box in such a way as to afford easy access to the connectors.

Page 23 of 55



PS05032


VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

h) The connectors shall be the Deutsche series, with sealing plugs for any sockets not containing a wire.i) An “O” ring seal shall be an integral feature of the bulkhead connectors to eliminate the chance of water entering the connection and causing corrosion.

j) At any place where the harness or sub-harness passes through metal, heavy grommets shall be installed.

k) All sockets relays and equipment shall be clearly labelled. l) Any circuit, which draws 15 amperes or more, shall be switched through relays.m) Individual loads shall be wired to individual automatic reset circuit breakers. n) The circuit breakers shall be sized for the individual loads. o) There shall be two (2) sets of 12-volt power and grounding studs provided and installed behind the electrical centre cover for mobile radio and Mobile Data Terminal. p) A 40 amp self-resetting circuit breaker will be located at the batteries for circuit protection.3.4.6 Wiring Harnesses

a) Wiring harnesses shall be the automotive type, engineered specifically for the builder’s apparatus and under no circumstances shall diodes, resistors, or fusible links be located within the wiring harness.

b) All components shall be located in an easy to access wiring junction box or the main circuit breaker area.

c) All wire shall meet the white book, baseline, advanced design transit coach specification and Society of Automotive Engineers recommended practices.

d) It shall be stranded copper wire core with cross-linked polyethylene insulation complying with SAE specification J-1128.e) Each wire shall be colour coded and hot stamped with its number and function every three inches, starting one inch from the end and continuing throughout the entire harness. f) All terminals on the ends of the wiring harness shall be soldered unless a machine is used that gives an even and precise pressure for the terminal being used and all terminals given a adequate pressure pull test to insure their integrity.

g) There shall be an additional wiring harness with connectors left by the chassis manufacture to allow a harness for the pump panel systems to be plugged into.

h) Circuits shall be provided for multiplexed gauges, hand throttle, high idle switch and Pressure Sensitive Governor system. i) A circuit for a J1939 data link shall be provided at the dropout.


a) The apparatus shall be equipped with a V – MUX, Multiplex Management system, NO EXCEPTIONS.b) The Multiplex system shall be of a “Peer to Peer “ type.c) The modules shall have the ability to use Pulse Width Modulation at the outputs.

Page 24 of 55



PS05032


VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

d) The system shall be able to detect a short or open condition and report the problem in “real time”, by text-based message(s).

e) The system shall have the ability to control the HVAC system and be an integral part of the Multiplex system.

f) The system shall have the ability to shed electrical loads at least to eight (8) different voltage levels and assign a level to any or all outputs. g) The system shall have the ability to sequence electrical loads from 0 to 8 levels on any load(s). h) The system shall be able to flash any output in either an A or B phase and use a logic signal to shut down needed outputs when in park, or any one of several combined interlocks. i) The flash rate can be selected at either 80, or 160 FPM., flashing outputs can also be used to warn of problems.j) The inputs shall have the ability to switch by a ground or vbatt signal. k) The inputs shall be filtered for noise suppression via hardware and software so that RF or dirty power will not trick an input into changing its status. l) There shall be a display that will be able to provide real time information regarding load shedding and system status, such as network traffic/errors or shorts and open circuits. m) The Multiplex system shall be able to perform in extreme temperature conditions, from – 40° to + 85° C (-40° to +185° F). n) The system shall be sealed against the environment, moisture, humidity, salt or fluids such as diesel fuel, motor oil or brake fluid. o) The modules shall be protected from over voltage and reverse polarity.p) There shall be no” added modules”, the module with the output signal shall perform the function. q) A multiplex electrical system shall be supplied that shall include the following:

i. Dash mounted information centre with a 6”H x 4”W Vista colour screen display. ii. Systems diagnostic menu and controls. iii. Solid state switching. iv. Peer to Peer network architecture. v. Weatherproof Nodes. vi. Must comply with SAE J-1939 protocols.

3.4.8 110 Volt/220 Volt Wiring Systems

a) The complete wiring and electrical installation shall conform to present National Electrical Code and the requirements of the NFPA 1901 – 2003 edition. b) The wiring, electrical fixtures and components shall be to the highest industry quality standards available on the market. c) The equipment shall be the type as designed for mobile type installations subject to vibration, moisture, and severe continuous usage.

d) The electrical components and wire shall exceed the minimum acceptable standard for this type of apparatus.

e) All electrical wiring shall be fine stranded copper type THHN, sized to load and circuit breaker rating.

Page 25 of 55



PS05032


VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

f) Wiring shall be colour coded and printed with function every 3" for easy identification.

g) All 120/240 volt wiring in the apparatus body shall be through flexible moisture resistant reinforced conduit, with proper seal tight connectors and hardware.

h) All circuit breakers shall be labelled as to usage. Metal engraved or plastic coded labels shall be provided for all exterior and interior outlets indicating output amperage. i) An "As Built" electrical wiring diagram schematic will be supplied with the completed apparatus. j) The entire 120/240 volt electrical system shall be installed in compliance with NFPA 1901 – 2003 and done in accordance with CSA, and City of Vancouver’s electrical codes. k) This shall include all testing, labelling, wiring methodology, and dimensional requirements. l) Certification of compliance shall accompany the apparatus at the time of delivery. 3.4.9 Load Centre, Outlets and Circuits

a) There shall be a 120/240-volt load centre incorporated into the 120/240 volt wiring system.

b) The load centre shall include adequate circuit breakers to protect the loads specified for this apparatus.

c) The circuit breaker box shall be a 3-phase Cutler Hammer with cover and circuit breakers rated to the wire size and load demand.

d) The generator shall supply the electrical equipment and outlets with wiring to circuit breaker box.

e) There shall be two (2) 120-volt exterior outlets, one (1) each side near rear wheel well area. f) The outlets will be 120 volt, 20-amp twist lock style. Hubbell - HBL6331CN. g) Each outlet shall be protected by a 20 amp circuit breaker/ h) Two (2) 120-volt exterior outlets, one (1) each side rear of body. i) The outlet(s) will be 120 volt, 20-amp twist lock style, Hubbell - HBL6331CN.j) Each outlet shall be protected by a 20-amp circuit breaker. k) One (1) 120 volt straight blade outlets located inside exterior body compartments as listed in the compartment descriptions. l) The outlets will be 120 volt, 15-amp straight blade style.m) Each outlet shall be protected by a 15-amp circuit breaker.

3.4.10 Over current Protection

a) Over-current protection devices shall be provided for circuits in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 1901 – 2003 edition. b) The load centre shall be equipped with a non-GFI two pole main breaker when the six or more individual branch circuits are present.

c) Over current protection devices shall be marked with labels to identify the function of the circuit they protect.

Page 26 of 55



PS05032


VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

3.4.11 Shore Power

a) There shall be one (1) 220-volt circuit with a receptacle and base for providing shore power to the air compressor. b) The receptacle shall be located on the curbside of the vehicle, near the compressor for easy access. c) The "plug" end shall be shipped loose with the completed vehicle, the Fire Department shall install at the station.

3.4.12 Electric Cable Reels

a) The apparatus shall be equipped with two (2) electric cable reels in exterior compartments as noted under each compartment description section. b) Each cable reel shall be a Hannay ECR1616-17-18 with electric rewind, equipped with fully enclosed 30 amp, three (3) conductor collector rings. c) The 12-volt reel rewind system shall be directly wired to the chassis battery system with heavy-duty stranded copper wire, with guarded finger type rewind button located within easy reach of the operator. d) The wiring from the generator system shall be through electrical weatherproof conduit, with stranded copper wiring. e) The wiring shall terminate in a sealed conduit box at the reel with mechanical type connectors for quick removal of wiring. f) Each cable reel shall have a captive type, nylon roller assembly to permit cable to feed directly off the reel and away from compartment and a ball clamp located near end of cord.g) One (1) 120-volt circuit for each 120-volt electric cable reel with a 30-amp circuit breaker protection for each circuit.

h) The reel shall be equipped with 200’ of yellow STW Seoprene 105 degree Celsius 10/3 wire installed with a twist-lock female Hubbell - HBL6331CN plug at the end.

3.4.13 Junction Boxes

a) There shall be two (2) Extenda-Lite model EJB-CS backlit electrical GFI junction boxes, equipped with four (4) electrical receptacles, two on each side.b) Each junction box shall be equipped with a bracket. It shall be mounted on a compartment wall to store the junction box when not in use. c) The outlet(s) will be 120 volt, 20-amp twist lock style. Hubbell twist 4710 cn, Twistlock.d) Each outlet shall be protected by a 20-amp circuit breaker. e) Each receptacle shall be equipped with a spring loaded snap cover and pre-wired with a 1' pigtail with twist lock male plug for the cast aluminum junction box to supply power to the four receptacles. f) An extension cord shall be connected to the junction box through a heavy-duty water resistant strain relief and flexible extender.

g) Each side of the junction box shall be fitted with polypropylene faceplates that are backlit, so that plug orientation to the receptacles is quick and easy to align.

Page 27 of 55



PS05032


VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

3.4.14 Light Towers

a) The apparatus shall be equipped with two (2) Command Light CL 615 – 6 X 1500 Watt, all electric, all weather, continuous 360 degree rotation light towers with an auto park and back light features. b) The units shall not require tapping into vehicle braking system to be operated. c) Hydraulic or pneumatic type floodlights are not acceptable alternatives.d) The light banks each shall have three (3) weatherproof, 1,500 watt, 240 volt quartz halogen lights with the light heads mounted in a row of three (3) lights in the upright position. e) Power for light bank shall be transmitted through power collecting rings thus allowing 360 degrees rotation in either direction, NO EXCEPTIONS.

f) Positioning of the light bank shall be accomplished with maintenance free, heavy-duty 12-volt linear actuators.

g) The Command Light assemblies shall be all aluminum construction, with stainless steel shafts and bronze bushings for long life and low maintenance. h) Light towers shall be controlled with a hand-held umbilical line remote control with an "Auto-Park" automatic nesting feature. i) Command Light controls shall feature:

i. One (1) switch for each light bank. ii. One (1) light bank rotation switch. iii. One (1) switch for elevating lower stage. iv. One (1) switch for elevating upper stage. v. One (1) indicator light to indicate when light bank is out of roof nest position. vi. One (1) indicator light to indicate when light bank is rotated to the proper nest position. vii. One (1) "On/Off" switch for the top mounted strobe lightj) The light tower shall have a full extension of 10' - 6" from mounted position and shall extend from nested position to full upright in 20 seconds.k) The overall size of the nested light tower shall be approximately 40" wide x 73" long x 12-3/4" high. l) A flashing warning light shall be provided in cab, indicating when a light tower is not in nested position. m) The operational envelope of the mast shall be automatically illuminated whenever the mast assembly is being raised, lowered, or rotated. n) A red strobe light shall be supplied with the Command Light and mounted at its highest position. o) The light towers shall be installed on the roof of the cab, on the right side with a protective shroud. p) A 15-foot remote controller cord shall be connected through and stored in L1.

3.4.15 Rear Tripod Telescopic Floodlights

a) Two (2) Fire Research - Focus 500 watt 120-volt quartz tripod floodlights shall be provided on the rear of the apparatus body. b) The light shall have a twist lock plug, Hubbell - HBL6331CN and there shall be a matching twist lock outlet near the mounting location of the light.

Page 28 of 55



PS05032


VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

c) The telescoping floodlight shall have hand tightening locking device to secure the floodlight at any level and to revolve in any 360-degree position.

d) There shall be an "On/Off" switch on the light head.

e) The floodlights shall be protected with circuit breakers rated at the proper amperage and wire size.

3.4.16 Engine Tachometer & Hour Meter


3.4.17 Refrigerator

a) There shall be one (1) Norcold DE-441R 120VAC/12VDCrefrigerator/freezer combination installed in a compartment designed for it in an location to be determined at the pre construction meeting.

b) The refrigerator shall be able to operate on either 120 VAC or 12 VDC power.

3.4.18 Microwave

a) There shall be one (1) Sanyo 1500-watt 120VAC/ microwave unit installed in a compartment designed for it in an location to be determined at the pre construction meeting. b) The microwave shall operate on 120 VAC.

3.5 MAIN BODY MODULE

3.5.1 General

a) The fabrication of the sheet metal for the body module shall be by formed or bend and break construction.

b) All attachment points shall be heavily reinforced.c) To extend the expected service life of the vehicle, the body module shall be removable from the chassis frame, and be able to be installed on a new chassis. d) The apparatus body shall be constructed of a minimum of 3/16” 5052 H32 Marine Grade, smooth aluminum plate, this shall include compartment front panels, vertical side sheets, side upper rollover panels, rear panels and compartment door frames. e) The body compartment floors and exterior panels shall be constructed with not less than 3/16" (.187) aluminum 3003H-14 smooth plate. f) Interior compartment dividing walls shall be constructed with not less than 1/8" (.125) aluminum 3003H-14 smooth plate. g) Lighter gauge sheet metal will not be acceptable in these areas. h) The apparatus body shall be designed to provide maximum storage of equipment and other accessories outlined in these specifications. i) Anodized aluminum angle scuff plates shall be installed in the bottom sill area of all compartments and attached using a permanent bonding method. j) All side body compartments shall have sweep out type floors.

Page 29 of 55



PS05032


VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

k) There shall be a removable stainless steel cover to provide access to the fuel tank gauge-sending unit without the need to remove the fuel tank. l) The door side frame openings shall be formed "C" channel design. m) An electrical wiring conduit raceway running the full length of exterior compartments shall be provided. n) This raceway shall contain all 12 volt wiring running to the rear of the apparatus, permitting easy accessibility to wiring.

o) Dead air space voids between compartments will not be an acceptable method of compartment construction.

p) Compartment floors shall have a "sweep-out" design with door opening threshold positioned lower than compartment floor. q) All seams in sheet metal below frame, and around the rear wheel well area shall be welded continuous to prevent moisture from entering compartments. r) All other interior seams and corners shall be sealed with silicone-based caulk prior to painting.

s) Where bolted construction is used, slot-head, flush-type DZUZ Fasteners with “vibra tape” or anti vibration solution applied or VF&RS approved equal provided.

t) All interior access covers, back or side panels that are installed inside compartments where maintenance of hidden components will be required, shall be held in place by Hansen #46 small door fasteners with “vibra tape” or anti vibration solution applied, or VF&RS approved equal.

u) Metal screws or self-tapping screws or “pop rivets” shall not be used in any part of the apparatus.3.5.2 Body Mounting and Subframe

a) To assure proper body alignment and clearance, the body subframe shall be constructed directly on the chassis. b) The chassis frame rails shall be fitted with 5/16" x 2" fibre reinforced rubber to isolate the body frame members from direct contact with chassis frame rails. c) The body sub frame shall be constructed from 6061T6 aluminum alloy tubing, consisting of two (2) 2" x 6" x 1/4" aluminum tubes the same width as the chassis frame rails and welded to this tubing shall be cross members of 2" x 6" x 1/4" aluminum. d) The cross members shall extend the full width of the body to support the compartments.e) Crossmembers shall be located at front and rear of the body, below compartment divider walls, and in front and rear of wheel well opening.

f) Additional aluminum crossmembers shall be located as necessary to support walkway or heavy equipment.

g) The body subframe shall be fastened to the chassis frame with a minimum of six (6) spring loaded body mounts. h) Each mount shall be configured using a two piece encapsulated slide bracket. i) The two (2) brackets shall be fabricated of heavy-duty 1/4" thick steel and shall have a powder coat finish to prevent any corrosion. j) Each mounting assembly shall utilizing two (2) 5/8” diameter x 6" long grade L9 bolts and two (2) heavy duty springs.

Page 30 of 55



PS05032


VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

k) The assembly design shall allow the body and subframe to act as one (1) component, separate from the chassis. l) The spring loaded body mounts shall also prevent frame side rail or body damage caused by unevenly distributed stress and strains due to load and chassis movement. m) Body mountings that will not allow relief from chassis movement will not be acceptable.


a) The interior of the body compartments shall be coated with a grey Zolotone, splatter coating. b) The coating shall be applied as to be durable enough to withstand everyday abuse of equipment removal and shifting. c) All compartment floors that do not have permanently mounted equipment shall be protected with DRI-DEK flooring tiles. d) The tiles shall be black with yellow angled leading edges.


a) Each body compartment shall be vented directly to the atmosphere in a manner that will reduce the amount of dirt and water that may enter the compartment.

b) One-way rubber drain valves shall be provided in compartment floors so that a water hose may be used to flush-out compartment area.

3.5.5 Roll up Doors

a) All compartment doors shall be equipped with a Robinson brand roll-up door. b) The Roll-up door shall have a satin finish, be a shutter type, with 34mm slats that roll onto a spool at the top front of the compartment. c) There shall be an aluminum drip rail with a non-abrasive seal at the top and an aluminum sill plate.

d) Each slat shall be equipped with nylon end shoes to assure operation without the need of constant lubrication.

e) Each track shall be equipped with replaceable side seals and a water dam style lip.


a) All high side compartments shall be furnished with a Whelen strip light, model # PSCACCR compartment light, Level 3, mounted on the backside of the compartment.

b) An automatic door switch shall activate these compartment lights.

c) All full height compartments shall be equipped with a Whelen strip light model # PSCACCR compartment light Level 3 mounted on the backside of the compartment.

d) An automatic door switch shall activate these compartment lights.

Page 31 of 55



PS05032


VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

e) All compartments that have a door opening larger than 42” wide shall have a Whelen strip light model PSCACCR compartment light Level 3 mounted on the rear side of the compartment. f) There shall be lighting installed in all compartments or enclosed equipment areas with four or more cubic feet of storage. g) There shall be one (1) additional compartment strip light installed under all adjustable shelves provided in the compartments. h) The lights shall be installed on the strut channels provided on the compartment wall. 3.5.7 Locking Door Handles

a) The roll-up doors shall be supplied with a keyed alike, full width handle, for ease of opening and nylon end shoes on every slat to assure operation without constant lubrication.


a) There shall be two sets of strut channels installed in four (4) standard height compartments. b) There shall be two sets of strut channels installed in four (4) full height compartments.

c) There shall be four (4) cast aluminum shelf brackets to mount each shelf, tray or adjustable storage module.

d) Shelving hardware shall be of heavy-duty quality with unlimited vertical adjustment settings.


a) There shall be nine (9) adjustable shelves constructed of 3/16” aluminum 300H-14 alloy with 2” lips on all sides. b) The shelves shall be coated with thermoplastic polyurethane coating. c) The shelves shall be fabricated in such a manner that liquids readily drain when spilled. d) The floor of the shelves shall be covered with DRI-DEK flooring tiles. e) The shelves shall be installed in body compartments as directed by VF&RS.

3.5.10 Side Body Protection

a) To assist personnel in reaching equipment from exterior compartments on the street side ahead of the wheels and to provide side body protection two (2) running board/rub rails shall be provided. b) The running board shall be constructed from 3/16" aluminum 3003H-14 alloy tread plate. c) Running board will have a 5" high vertical toe kick x 8" deep with 1" rub rail and a 1" return break for strength and rigidity. d) The running board shall extend 1" to provide side body rub rail protection. e) To assist personnel in reaching equipment from exterior compartments on the street side ahead of the rear wheels and to provide side body protection one (1) running board/rub rail shall be provided. f) The running board shall be constructed from 3/16" aluminum 3003H-14 alloy tread plate.

Page 32 of 55



PS05032


VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

g) The running board will have a 5" high vertical toe kick x 8" deep with 1" rub rail and a 1" return break for strength and rigidity. h) The running board shall extend 1" to provide side body rub rail protection.i) To assist personnel in reaching equipment from exterior compartments on the curbside and to provide side body protection two (2) running board/rub rails shall be provided. j) The running board shall be constructed from 3/16" aluminum 3003H-14 alloy tread plate. k) The running board will have a 5" high vertical toe kick x 8" deep with 1" rub rail and a 1" return break for strength and rigidity. l) The running board shall extend 1" to provide side body rub rail protection. m) To assist personnel in reaching equipment from exterior compartments on the curbside and to provide side body protection one (1) running board/rub rails shall be provided. n) The running board shall be constructed from 3/16" aluminum 3003H-14 alloy tread plate.o) The running board will have a 5" high vertical toe kick x 8" deep with 1" rub rail and a 1" return break for strength and rigidity. p) The running board shall extend 1" to provide side body rub rail protection.

3.5.11 Left Side Compartment L1

a) There shall be a full height transverse compartment located at the front of the body on the left side of the apparatus body; this compartment shall be designated as L1. b) This compartment shall be equipped with a Robinson brand roll-up door. c) The compartment shall have a door opening of approximately 54” wide x 69” high. d) The interior shall have a usable space of approximately 48” wide x 23” deep in the lower portion and transverse above the frame to the curbside.e) There shall be vertically mounted Uni-Strut for shelving installation. f) There shall be one (1) adjustable shelf approximately 46" deep located in upper portion of compartment for storage of two (2) EZ-Up Tents. g) There shall be one (1) 1,000 lb. slide-out tray with a SlideMaster base, approximately 46" deep. h) This tray shall be located above the chassis frame rails in front of the compartment for storage of four (4) Poulan Pro 455 ventilation chain saws and four (4) Partner K950 active cut off saws. i) There shall be one (1) 1,000 lb. slide-out tray with a Slide Master base, transverse to the curbside, capable of extending out either side of the body. j) The tray shall be located above the level of the chassis frame rails in rear of compartment for storage of two (2) 6' folding tables and twelve (12) steel folding chairs.k) The 12-volt electrical distribution panel. l) The floor of the compartment above the frame rails shall be extended to the interior edge of the door. m) The floor material shall be 3/16" thick aluminum and shall have a 2" vertical lip and a 1" return to increase strength.

Page 33 of 55



PS05032


VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

n) This compartment shall be furnished and mounted with Two (2) Whelen strip lights, model # PSCACCR compartment light.

3.5.12 Left Side Compartment L2.

a) There shall be a full height compartment located ahead of the rear wheels on the right side of the apparatus body, this compartment shall be designated as L2.

b) This compartment shall be equipped with a Robinson brand roll-up door. c) The door shall have an opening of approximately 48” wide x 69” high. d) The interior shall have a usable space of approximately 54” wide x 23” deep to the frame rails and transverse above the frame to the curbside in the upper portion. e) There shall be one (1) adjustable shelf approximately 46" deep.f) There shall be one (1) 1,000 lb. slide-out tray with a SlideMaster base, approximately 46" deep. g) The tray shall be located above the chassis frame rails for storage of two (2) Super Vac P200SE and two (2) F164 electric ventilation fans. h) One (1) 120-volt electrical cable reel shall be located in this compartment. i) The floor of the compartment above the frame rails shall be extended to the interior edge of the door. j) The floor material shall be 3/16" thick aluminum and shall have a 2" vertical lip and a 1" return to increase strength. k) This compartment shall be furnished and mounted with two (2) Whelen strip lights, model # PSCACCR compartment light.


a) There shall be a compartment located above the rear wheels on the left side of the apparatus body, this compartment shall be designated as L3. b) This compartment shall be equipped with a Robinson brand roll-up door.c) The door shall have an opening of approximately 53” wide x 41” high. d) The interior shall have a usable space of approximately 64” wide and traverse to the curbside. e) There shall be one (1) breathing air compressor located in this compartment. f) There shall be six (6) air storage cylinders in a mounting rack in this compartment. g) This compartment shall be furnished and mounted with a Whelen strip light, model # PSCACCR compartment light.


a) There shall be a full height compartment located behind the rear wheels on the left side of the apparatus body, this compartment shall be designated as L4. b) This compartment shall be equipped with a Robinson brand roll-up door. c) The door shall have an opening of approximately 59” wide x 69” high.

Page 34 of 55



PS05032


VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

d) The interior shall have a usable space of approximately 63” wide x 23” deep to the frame rails and traverse above the frame to the curbside. e) There shall be vertically mounted Uni-Strut for shelving installation. f) There shall be one (1) slide-out smooth aluminum vertical tool board approximately 46" deep located in front portion of compartment for storage of six (6) Fire Department SCBA 's. g) There shall be one (1) SCBA cylinder rack capable of storing eighteen (18) SCBA air bottles, manufactured using 8" ID PVC tubes. h) There shall be six (6) Zico walkaway type SCBA air pack brackets without CRS straps. i) Located between the slide-out SCBA tool board and the air bottle rack shall be an area for storage of a air bottle dolly. j) This dolly shall be a heavy-duty rubber tire dolly with a removable aluminum box for vertical storage of four (4) air cylinders in 8" diameter PVC tubing. k) The floor of the compartment above the frame rails shall cover the area directly above the frame rails only.l) This compartment shall be furnished and mounted with two (2) Whelen strip lights, model # PSCACCR compartment light.


a) There shall be a full height transverse compartment located at the front of the body on the right side of the apparatus body; this compartment shall be designated as R1. b) This compartment shall be equipped with a Robinson brand roll-up door. c) The compartment shall have a door opening of approximately 48” wide x 69” high. d) The interior shall have a usable space of approximately 54” wide x 23” deep in the lower portion and transverse above the frame to the curbside e) There shall be vertically mounted Uni-Strut for shelving installation.f) There shall be one (1) adjustable shelf approximately 46" deep. g) There shall be one (1) 1,000 lb. slide-out tray with a Slide Master base; approximately 46” deep located above the chassis frame rails on the right side of the door opening. h) The rear half of this tray shall have three (3) sides 24” high and open to the front.

i) Located in the forward portion of compartment shall be storage for two (2) Survive Air 120 VAC water vacs.

j) There shall be one (1) 1,000 lb. slide-out tray with a Slide Master base, transverse to the curbside, capable of extending out either side of the body for storage of chairs and tables.k) The floor of the compartment above the frame rails shall be extended to the interior edge of the door. l) The floor material shall be 3/16" thick aluminum and shall have a 2" vertical lip and a 1" return to increase strength.

m) This compartment shall be furnished and mounted with Two (2) Whelen strip lights, model # PSCACCR compartment light.

Page 35 of 55



PS05032


VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO


a) There shall be a full height compartment located ahead of the rear wheels on the right side of the apparatus body; this compartment shall be designated as R2.

b) This compartment shall be equipped with a Robinson brand roll-up door. c) The door shall have an opening of approximately 48” wide x 69” high. d) The interior shall have a usable space of approximately 54” wide x 23” deep in the lower portion and transverse above the frame to the street side. e) There shall be vertically mounted Uni-Strut for shelving installation. f) There shall be one (1) 1,000 lb. slide-out tray with a SlideMaster base, approximately 46" deep for the storage of four (4) Super Vac 720 G4H and two (2) 718G4G gas ventilation fans. g) There shall be one (1) 120-volt electrical cable reel located in R2. h) The floor of the compartment above the frame rails shall be extended to the interior edge of the door. i) The floor material shall be 3/16" thick aluminum and shall have a 2" vertical lip and a 1" return to increase strength. j) This compartment shall be furnished and mounted with two (2) Whelen strip lights, model # PSCACCR compartment light.


a) There shall be a full height compartment located above of the rear wheels on the right side of the apparatus body; this compartment shall be designated as R3.

b) This compartment shall be equipped with a Robinson brand roll-up door. c) The door shall have an opening of approximately 53” wide x 41” high.

d) The interior shall have a usable space of approximately 64” wide and transverse to the street side.

e) The 120/240-volt electrical load centre shall be located in this compartment.f) One (1) air Compressor 240 volt electrical outlet and shore power shall be located here.g) One (1) breathing air compressor shall be located in this compartment. h) Six (6) air storage cylinders in a mounting rack shall be located in R3. i) This compartment shall be furnished and mounted with two (2) Whelen strip lights, model # PSCACCR compartment light.


a) There shall be a full height compartment shall be located behind the rear wheels on the right side of the apparatus body, this compartment shall be designated as R4. b) This compartment shall be equipped with a Robinson brand roll-up door.

Page 36 of 55



PS05032


VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

c) The door shall have an opening approximately 59” wide x 69” high. d) The interior shall have a usable space of approximately 63” wide x 23” deep to the frame rails and transverse above the frame to the street side. e) There shall be vertically mounted Uni-Strut for shelving installation. f) There shall be one (1) slide-out smooth aluminum vertical tool board approximately 46" deep located in front portion of compartment for storage of six (6) Fire Department complete SCBA 's. g) There shall be one (1) SCBA spare cylinder rack capable of storing eighteen (18) SCBA air bottles, manufactured using 8" ID PVC tubes. h) There shall be six (6) Zico walkaway type SCBA air pack bracket(s) without CRS straps. i) Located between the slide-out SCBA tool board and the air bottle rack shall be an area for storage of a air bottle dolly. j) This dolly shall be a heavy-duty rubber tire dolly with a removable aluminum box for vertical storage of four (4) air cylinders in 8" diameter PVC tubing. k) The floor of the compartment above the frame rails shall cover the area directly above the frame rails only. l) This compartment shall be furnished and mounted with two (2) Whelen strip lights, model # PSCACCR compartment light.

3.5.19 Rear Compartment T1

a) A full height compartment shall be located at the rear of the apparatus body, which is closed to both side compartments and this compartment shall be designated as T1. b) This compartment shall be equipped with a Robinson brand roll-up door. c) The door shall have an opening approximately 42” wide x 56” high. d) The interior shall have a usable depth of 64 inches. e) The air system fill station and controls shall be located in T1 f) One (1) high-pressure air hose reel and one (1) low-pressure air hose reel shall be located here.

g) The controls for the light tower shall be located in T1.

h) This compartment shall be furnished and mounted with two (2) Whelen strip lights, model # PSCACCR compartment light.

3.5.20 Rear Hatch

a) There shall be an opening in the roof structure over the wheel compartment to allow for access.b) The hatch shall be framed up with 2” x 2” tubing.c) The roof material around the hatch shall be formed to provide a 1 ½” vertical lip.d) There shall be a bolted in place aluminum treadplate cover that seals around the surrounding vertical lip surface.

3.5.21 Roll Out Awning - Street Side

a) A heavy-duty canopy awning shall be installed on the street side of the apparatus body.

Page 37 of 55



PS05032


VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

b) The awning shall be full length of the body long with approximately 8' of extension length. c) The awning shall be manufactured with satin finish extruded aluminum arms and braces. d) The arm channels shall utilize nylon bearings for a smooth operation. e) The awning shall lock while in stored position to prevent any rattling during travel. f) The awning will lock and unlock with a remote brake control located on awning arm, not requiring the use of a wand. g) Features of the awning are:

i. Built-in Thin-Lite 12 volt amber fluorescent light. ii. Awning hangers. iii. Built-in awning tie downs to hold awning steady in a breeze. iv. Multi-layer, laminated vinyl fabric that resists scratches, stains, fading, mildew and # 8604 natural in colour. v. Alumaguard metal wrap cover.

3.5.22 Roll Out Awning - Curb Side

a) A heavy-duty canopy awning shall be installed on the curbside of the apparatus body. b) The awning shall be full length of the body long with approximately 8' of extension length. c) The awning shall be manufactured with satin finish extruded aluminum arms and braces. d) The arm channels shall utilize nylon bearings for a smooth operation. e) The awning shall lock while in stored position to prevent any rattling during travel. f) The awning will lock and unlock with a remote brake control located on awning arm, not requiring the use of a wand. g) Features of the awning are:

i. Built-in Thin-Lite 12 volt amber fluorescent light. ii. Awning hangers. iii. Built-in awning tie downs to hold awning steady in a breeze. iv. Multi-layer, laminated vinyl fabric that resists scratches, stains, fading, mildew and # 8604 natural in colour. v. Alumaguard metal wrap cover.

3.5.23 Roll out Awning – Rear

a) The upper rear of truck shall be equipped with a Carefree Lb. Freedom II box awning.b) The box the awning is stored in is approximately 8’ wide x 5-3/8” high x 3-3/8” deep and white in colour. c) The awning shall be 8’ wide with an extension length of 6-1/2'. The awning support arms are hidden inside the contour styled box. d) There are no latches or knobs to unlock, to extend awning, simply engage and turn the hand crank. e) The awning arms shall foldout of the lead bar once it’s eye level and adjust easily with flip lock controls.

f) To close, the crank is moved in the opposite direction and the awning case shall lock shut automatically.

Page 38 of 55



PS05032


VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

g) The awning shall be 18 oz., 1000 denier for the best protection of the vinyl fabric and be white in colour.

3.5.24 Interior Cabinet

a) There shall be one (1) interior counter height cabinet furnished and installed. b) Each cabinet shall be constructed of 1/8" smooth aluminum. c) Each cabinet shall be approximately 40" Wide x 24" Deep x 32" High. d) The exposed surfaces of each cabinet shall have a Hammertone gray powder coat finish.

e) The cabinet shall have an open front face (no door).

f) There shall be one (1) vertically adjustable shelf on opposite side of refrigerator location for a microwave. g) There shall be a Norcold 12 VDC/120 VAC refrigerator located below the cabinet on floor of cab.

h) A 0.7 cu. Ft, 1500 watt countertop microwave oven shall be provided and secured to adjustable shelf opposite the refrigerator location and wired to generator system.

i) Final layout to be determined at pre-construction meeting.

3.5.25 SCBA Cylinder Racks

a) There shall be two SCBA spare bottle racks for storing eighteen (18) SCBA 6” bottles each. b) The racks shall be made from 8” ID PVC tubing. c) The SCBA cylinder rack shall have a shell fabricated of 1/8” smooth aluminum. d) There shall be a 2” slope to the PVC tube rack.

e) There shall be rubber matting installed in each tube.

3.5.26 SCBA Walk- Away Air Pack Brackets

a) SCBA air pack walk-away type brackets located as indicated in the numbered compartment list.

b) The walk-away bracket shall have high cycle retention clips specifically for 6” Interspiro brand of air cylinder.

c) There shall also be a positive type restraint strap to secure the bottle into the walk-away bracket. d) There shall be rubber matting installed inside each storage tube for bottle protection.

3.5.27 Roll out Equipment Trays

a) The heavy-duty slide-out equipment trays shall be fabricated from 3/16" (.188) aluminum 3003H-14 alloy smooth plate. b) The trays shall be built with a 4" high vertical lip, with welded corners, to form a box type tray surface. c) The tray shall be mounted on a 3-rail heavy-duty structural steel frame with twelve (12) sealed 1,000 lb. static load ball bearings.

d) The slide-out tray shall be rated for a maximum 1,000 lb. distributed load, and a 500 lb. concentrated end load.

Page 39 of 55



PS05032


VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

e) The tray shall be locked in its stored position as well as at 50% and 100% of extension for loading or as a stationary work surface.

3.5.28 Dual Direction Roll Out Equipment Trays

a) There shall be heavy duty, dual direction, slide-out equipment trays, which are fabricated from 3/16" (.188) aluminum 3003H-14 alloy smooth plate. b) Each tray shall be built with a 4" high vertical lip, with welded corners, to form a box type tray surface.c) The tray shall be mounted on a 2-rail heavy-duty structural steel frame with twelve (12) sealed 1,000 lb. static load ball bearings.

d) The slide-out tray shall be rated for a maximum 1,000 lb. distributed load, and a 500 lb. concentrated end load.

e) The tray shall be locked in its' stored position as well as at 40%, and 70% of extension for loading or as a stationary work surface.

3.5.29 Slide-Out Tool Board

a) Slide-out tool board(s) shall be provided in exterior compartment, as indicated in the numbered compartment list. b) Tool boards shall be fabricated of 3/16" (.188) aluminum 3003H-14 alloy smooth plate with double flange at outer edge to provide an easy grip handle. c) The top and bottom of tool board shall be provided with AccuRide 502 series slide tracks. d) The length shall be per numbered compartment list and the extension shall be 100% of the slide length. e) Slide tracks shall be constructed from formed steel with ball bearings in triple track rails.f) Each tool board shall utilize a pneumatic cylinder to hold the toolboard in both the opened and closed positions. g) Both the upper and lower roller slide shall be mounted to adjustable Unistrut to allow the tool board to be relocated for best fit in the compartment


a) The fenders shall be integral with the body sides and compartments with a seamless appearance.b) The fenders shall be fitted with bolt in removable full circular inner-liners in the wheel well area for ease of cleaning and maintenance. c) There shall be sufficient clearance provided in the wheel wells to allow the use of tire chains when the apparatus is fully loaded.


a) Two (2) aluminum fenderettes shall be installed at the outboard edge of the rear wheel well area, one on each side. b) The fenderettes shall be bolted to the apparatus body using nylon washers to space them slightly away from the body to reduce build-up of road grime. c) The fenderettes shall be constructed of aluminum that has been polished to a high quality finish.

3.5.32 Mudflaps

Page 40 of 55



PS05032


VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

a) Four (4) mudflaps shall be installed on the apparatus, two at the front and two at the rear. b) The mudflaps shall be a minimum of ½” thick to prevent “sailing”.

3.5.33 3” Rear Bumper

a) There shall be a full width rear bumper constructed from minimum 2" x 6" x 1/4" aluminum tubing and covered with 3/16" aluminum tread plate. b) The bumper shall extend from the rear vertical body panel 3" with a 1" space between the body and bumper for water drainage. c) Bumper shall be a bolted on assembly and not an extension of the body subframe.

3.5.34 Handrails, Grab Rails and Steps

a) Handrails shall be stainless steel tubing not less than 1-1/4” in diameter covered with ribbed rubber grips.

b) All railing escutcheons and brackets shall be stainless steel or chrome, and bolted with stainless steel bolts.

c) The lower bracket on all vertical handrails shall have a drain hole drilled in it at the lowest point. d) All other steps where required to be open Grip Strut type or VF&RS approved equal.e) Handrails shall be provided in the following areas: To be determined at the pre-build conference

i. Grab handle on top of catwalk on the left side of the apparatus in front of the tank fill tower. ii. Grab handle on top of catwalk on the right side of the apparatus.

iii. Vertical handrail on right back rear to access steps.

iv. Vertical handrail on left back rear to access steps.

3.5.35 Stepping & Walking Surfaces

a) All designated exterior stepping, standing or walking surfaces shall be constructed of Grip Strut or textured Treadbright and provide a highly slip resistant surface, even when the surface is wet.b) All interior surfaces designated as stepping, standing, or walking areas shall be slip resistant when the surface is wet.

c) The running boards/ walkways shall be constructed of structural sheet metal that is integral with the body.

d) They shall be overlaid with aluminum Treadplate material to provide a slip resistant surface; the degree of slip resistance shall be in compliance with the intent of NFPA 1901 – 2003 edition. e) The backside of the aluminum Treadplate overlays shall be sprayed with a clear coat sealer that is pliable and resistant to scratches and chips to provide an insulating barrier between dissimilar metals.f) When the overlays are reinstalled, they shall be sealed at the edges with a caulking compound.g) The overlays that are installed shall be insulated from the body with nylon shoulder washers that extend into holes in the overlays.

Page 41 of 55



PS05032


VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

h) Stainless steel cap nuts shall be employed where bolt ends may damage equipment or cause injury. i) Treadplate overlays shall be provided in the following areas: i. All walkways and running boards. ii The entire rear surface of the body. Outside front faces of the side compartments. iii. The top surface of all side compartments, bending over the outside edge to form a driprail.

3.5.36 Fuel Fill



a) There shall be two (2) chrome plated tow eyes at the installed at the rear of the apparatus, below the bumper.

b) The tow eyes shall be bolted to a heavy-duty assembly that is welded to the frame. c) Each tow eye shall have a 2 ½” ID hole.

3.5.38 Wheel Chocks

a) Two (2) wheel chocks shall be provided with the apparatus that meet SAE # J-348 requirements. b) They shall be mounted in aluminum brackets at a place decided at the pre construction meeting.

3.5.39 Trailer Hitch

a) A class III, 7,500 lb. weight carrying rear hitch receiver shall be provided below the rear bumper. b) The 2” receiver shall be attached to the apparatus body frame. c) A 2” adjustable ball hitch will be included with the apparatus. d) A safety chain attachment and 7 pin trailer wiring plug receptacle shall be provided at the rear bumper.

3.6 LIMA PTO GENERATOR

3.6.1 General

a) The apparatus shall be equipped with a Lima single bearing generator with a capacity of 40,000 watts at 120/240 volt, 333/181 amps, 3-phase, 60 cycles.

b) The generator shall be mounted between the chassis frame rails. c) The mounting brackets shall be fabricated using heavy duty 12" x 3" structural channel.d) The generator mounting shall be bolted and removable so that the generator can be lowered from under apparatus for service, if necessary. e) The generator case shall not extend below the bottom edge of the apparatus body.

3.6.2 Generator Monitoring Panel

Page 42 of 55



PS05032


VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

a) To properly monitor the generator performance and load demand during operation, the generator installation shall be equipped with a full instrument monitor panel.

b) The monitor shall be a FRC model FROG-D, mounted next to the circuit breaker panel. c) The generator output display shall be in LCD readouts for the following:

i. Voltmeter ii. Ammeter per line iii. Hour meter iv. Frequency meter

3.6.3 Generator Grounding

a) The generator system shall be provided with a Hannay, spring rewind-grounding reel with 20' of stranded copper ground cable and heavy duty welding clamp.

b) One (1) end to be permanently attached to apparatus frame, forming a low resistance ground to the generator and all 120-volt circuits. c) Ground rod shall be 3' long with an integrated weight hammer to drive the rod into the ground. Ground rod shall be stored in a compartment.

3.7 Breathing Air System

3.7.1 General

a) The mobile breathing air system designed so major components are built in individual modules. b) All modules shall be interconnected by means of a factory built and tested wiring harness for ease of electrical installation.

c) All pneumatic interconnections shall be clearly marked and coded for high-pressure hose interconnection.

d) This unit shall be designed and built specifically for truck installations; the use of a standard stationary unit shall not be acceptable.e) The compressor frame shall contain the compressor, electric motor, electric controls, gauges and monitors pertaining to the compressor operation. f) This skid must be designed for mounting across the body, with all gauges and shutdown lights facing the curbside of the truck.

g) The system shall consist of a Bauer Model K-22.42-6K-30-EB air compressor system constructed to the K-22.42 specification and shall be equipped with automatic priority filling and an automatic cascade, NO EXCEPTION.

h) The air system shall be installed to the highest of standards as they apply to this vehicle. i) All fittings and hoses shall be rated for the maximum allowable pressure that could be encountered, with a 3 to 1 safety factor. j) All fittings, tubing and hoses shall be corrosion resistant or treated to resist corrosion. No threaded close nipples shall be used. k) Plugs shall be par stock type hex heads; all piping and tubing shall be blown out with clean, dry air before it is installed.

Page 43 of 55



PS05032


VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

l) All rigid piping compressed air lines shall be secured to a rigid body or chassis component at a minimum of every 16" and within 4" on each side of a coupling or elbow. m) Rigid piping shall run in an orderly manner with a minimum of bends and elbows. n) The piping installation shall provide room for maintenance and repairs with easy access panels provided where applicable. o) Flexible hoses shall be installed in such a manner as to prevent cuts, abrasion, and exposure to damage, excessive temperatures and damage from loose equipment, and excessive bending. p) The hose shall be installed in a manner that permits removal of the hose without removal of major vehicle components or vehicle mounted equipment. q) Surfaces over 142 degrees F. shall be covered with a thermal insulating material or suitable guarded to protect the operator unless such protections affect the operation of component. r) A label shall be provided that states "Caution Hot Surface When Operating". s) The system shall be designed and constructed to withstand the stresses, vibrations, and other conditions incident to being mounted on a fire apparatus and being used in mobile service.

t) All screws, pins, bolts, or other fasteners whose failure would create a hazardous condition for personnel or equipment shall be equipped with locking devices.

u) Safety wire, self-locking nuts, cotter pins, lock-washers, and liquid locking components shall be acceptable. v) The entire system shall meet all requirements established by the Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA), Department of Transportation (DOT), Compressed Gas Association (CGA), American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME), and NFPA 1901, 2003 edition, Chapter 21. CSE Breathing air standard CAN 3-Z180.1-00 and BC Boiler and Pressure Vessel compliant with CNR numbers.3.7.2 Air Compressor

a) The compressor shall be air-cooled, oil lubricated, four stage, three cylinders, reciprocating piston compressor. b) The compressor shall have:

i. A maximum operating pressure of 6,000 PSIG. ii. A charging rate of 36.0 SCFM. iii. A have free air of 31.0 SCFM. iv. A running speed of 1250 RPM. v. Four (4) stages. vi. Three (3) cylinders. vii. A combination of pressure and splash lubrication.viii. Ambient operating range shall be 32o F to 105o F. c) The three cylinders shall be arranged in a "W" configuration. d) The first and second stages shall be housed in one common, stepped cylinder, which shall be the centre of the "W".

e) The 3rd and 4th stages shall be opposite each other, and form the outer legs of the "W". The first, second and third stages shall be equipped with piston rings.

Page 44 of 55



PS05032


VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

f) The fourth stage piston shall be a floating piston with eight chromium-plated quad piston rings running in a cylinder liner. g) The floating piston shall be guided by a retainer, which, in turn, shall be connected, to the guide piston, No Exception. h) The compressor shall have:

i. 5-micron inlet particulate filter. ii. Air cooled intercoolers between each stage. iii. Air cooled aftercooler. iv. Safety relief valve for each stage of compression. v. Final oil and moisture separator. vi. V-belt driven fan wheel for cooling air. vii. Oil filler and sight glass. viii. Oil filter (Full flow/spin on type).

ix. Automatic condensate drain, complete with combination separator-muffler, drain solenoid, and timer.

i) The compressor module shall have the ability to compress ambient air to a final pressure of 6,300 PSI G. BC Boiler and Pressure Vessels CRN component registry is required.j) System shall be designed, built and tested by a recognized breathing air compressor manufacture. k) Compressor shall be supplied with an automatic condensate drain system, which will automatically drain the interstage and final oil\moisture separators at 15-minute intervals. l) All condensation shall be plumbed to a collection system for safe disposal. m) Compressor unloading at shutdown shall be provided by the automatic drain system. n) The compressor shall have intercoolers and an after cooler of such a size that a cool down cycle will not be necessary.

3.7.3 Electric Motor

a) The compressor shall be powered by a 30 HP, 208/230/480 VAC, three (3) phase, 60 hertz, and electric motor of an open drip-proof design. b) The electric motor shall be mounted on a common vibration isolated inner frame.

c) All electric controls and automatic shutdowns shall be controlled and monitored by a solid state PLC control unit.

d) The entire electrical control panel shall be UL / ULC approved (no exception). e) The electric motor shall get its power from the trucks on-board generator system and be equipped with a Wye Delta motor starter to act as a Soft Start Feature for the compressor motor. f) The compressor system shall Include:

i. Open drip proof electric motor. ii. Wye Delta motor starter in NEMA 122 enclosure. iii. Inlet particulate filter. iv. Hi temp shutdown. v Low oil pressure shutdown. vi. Final pressure switch. vii. Gauge panel. viii. Pressure maintaining valve. ix. Discharge check valve. x Final oil/moisture separator.

Page 45 of 55



PS05032


VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

xi. Automatic cascade controls. xii. Automatic priority filling of storageg) The compressor system shall be base mounted, frame enclosed, complete with a belt guard.

3.7.4 Purification System

a) A BC Boiler and Pressure Vessels compliant CNR registered and Bauer air purification system shall be installed after the compressor and the final oil and water separator with a Bauer Securus electronic purification monitor. b) The system shall be capable of processing a minimum of 230,000 CU.FT. of breathing air between cartridge changes. c) The purification system shall utilize aluminum replaceable filter elements that have a minimum 3-year shelf life.

d) The high-pressure cartridge chambers shall have a working pressure of 6,300 PSIG with a 4 to 1 safety factor.

e) The cartridge chambers are to be designed to ASME codes, then tested and certified. The pressure vessels will be constructed of A105 alloy with a nickel plated interior and exterior and be registered with BC Boiler and Pressure Vessels and have valid CNR numbers.

f) A permanent nametag shall be attached to each chamber giving the serial number, year of manufacture, and volume of cylinder and test date, No Exceptions. g) The design of the cartridge pressure chamber shall eliminate the possibility of operating the system without purification cartridges installed or with improperly installed cartridges.

h) The Securus electronic purification monitor shall constantly monitor the quality of the air and visually indicate to the operator the status of the Securus cartridge.

i) The Securus electronic sensor shall be built into the purification cartridge itself.

j) The system shall warn the operator, in advance of the impending expiration of the Securus purification cartridge.

k) The purification system shall automatically shut down the compressor if the operator fails to change the cartridge within the warning period. l) The electronic display monitor shall indicate the Securus shut down the compressor. m) The compressor shall not be able to restart until the used cartridge is replaced with a new one. n) The monitoring system shall also discern an electrical contact failure or a printed circuit board failure and advise the operator of the type failure, either a Cartridge saturation or electrical failure. o) For absolute safety, no manual override shall be provided for the electronic purification monitor. p) A check valve shall be installed after the oil and moisture separator and before the purification system, and a pressure-maintaining valve shall be installed after the purification system. q) The pressure-maintaining valve shall be set to open at 6,000 PSIG and shall serve two functions:

i. To maintain a positive pressure in the purification system when the compressor shuts down.

Page 46 of 55



PS05032


VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

ii To provide a means to quickly build system pressure.

r) A bleed valve shall be provided to facilitate venting the purification system for cartridge maintenance.

s) The final processed air delivered by the purification system shall meet or surpass the standards for grade E as detailed in compressed gas association, Inc. pamphlets G-7-1976 compressed air for human respiration and G-7.1-1989 commodity specification for air.

t) The purification system shall be mounted directly on the compressor skid and in the path of the compressor cooling air. u) The purification shall be attached to the compressor skid and be able to swing, pull or tilt out of compartment to allow for change out of cartridges when installed with limited overhead space.v) All pressure components of the filtration system will have BC Boiler and Pressure Vessels CNR registered components

3.7.5 Carbon Monoxide Monitor

a) There shall be a NYAD 500 series monitor with a microprocessor-based controller coupled to an electrochemical sensor module supplied and installed. b) The monitor shall have an operating range of 0 to 2000 PPM CO in air or inert gas and shall display the results as well as provide a voltage or current output as well as an adjustable alarm contact and audible alarm.c) The monitor shall have a response time of 90% in 30 seconds or less. d) The monitor shall have a continuous operating temperature range of -5O C to +40O C.

3.7.6 Air Compressor and Components

a) A manufactures nameplate shall be securely affixed to all major modules in a conspicuous location. All equipment shall be new and of current tested design and manufacture.

b) Used and/or refurbished equipment is unacceptable.

c) The manufacturer of the high-pressure compressor shall also be the manufacturer of the breathing air purification system and the cartridge monitoring system.

d) All standard features shall be factory installed and tested as a complete unit, and a copy of the factory test report shall accompany the unit at delivery. e) The compressor, purification system and storage system shall be rated for 6,300-PSI service. BC Boiler and Pressure vessels CNR registry is required. NO EXCEPTION. f) Air system shall be supplied with interconnecting wiring harness, manufactured by Bauer Compressors. g) All interconnecting lines from one module to the other shall be clearly marked and tagged.

3.7.7 Air Booster System

a) The air compressor module shall be provided with a Bauer air booster system. b) The booster shall not be a separate compressor but rather a function of the standard compressor.

Page 47 of 55



PS05032


VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

c) The booster shall provide a means of refilling SCBA cylinders to pressures up to 4,500 PSIG with stored air that is below the SCBA fill pressure.d) A selector switch on the control panel shall control whether the air being compressed is from the surrounding ambient air (normal compression) or from the storage system (boost). e) The booster feature shall utilize the air in the storage system that shall be totally independent and immune to surrounding conditions. f) The booster valving, regulators and piping shall be mounted on the compressor/booster module. g) The compressor module shall be provided with booster controls including primary and secondary inlet pressure regulators. h) The air system fill/control panel shall be provided with compressor/boost control switch.

3.7.8 Breathing Air Storage System

a) Breathing air system shall be provided with an air storage module consisting of Six (6) 6,000 psi ASME air storage receivers which comply with 29 CFR 1910.169, "Air Receivers".b) Each receiver shall be permanently stamped or identified in accordance with ASME regulations. The pressure vessel is to be BC Boiler and Pressure Vessels compliant with CNR numbers.c) Each cylinder shall have a working pressure of 6,000 psi with a 3:1 safety factor.d) The nominal capacity of each receiver shall be 481 cu.ft. at 6,000 psi, 70 degrees F, for a total air capacity of 2,886 cu.ft. e) Each receiver shall be interpiped with a factory set ASME type relief valve set at 6,600 psi and a shutoff valve. f) There shall be a label that reads, "HIGH PRESSURE -6,000 psi BREATHING AIR". g) The cascade system shall be capable of filling approximately sixty-six (66) 45 cu.ft. 2,216 psi, or forty (40) 45 cu.ft. 4,500 psi SCBA bottles (based on residual pressure of 500 Psig).

h) The air cylinders shall be horizontally and securely mounted at both ends to comply with all DOT regulations.

i) The mounting system shall be designed to withstand severe service to be expected of this type of apparatus.

3.7.9 Filling Station

a) There shall be one (1) Bauer model CFSII-2S or equivalent, containment type, three-(3) position filling station with compressor controls provided and located per the itemized compartment list. The containment station is to have third party testing and be BC Boiler and Pressure Vessel compliant with CNR numbers.

b) Filling station shall be approximately 35 ½” wide (inc. side panel) x 57 ¼” high (inc. top panel) x 21 ¼” deep.

c) The filling station shall incorporate the primary compressor control panel located on the right side of the filling station and shall not add more then 6” to the overall width of the filling station.

Page 48 of 55



PS05032


VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

d) The fill station shall contain the cylinder and any fragments of the cylinder in the unlikely event of a cylinder exploding during the refilling process. e) The filling station shall vent the expanding air away from the operator and out the bottom of the truck compartment. f) The filling station shall be designed for a maximum working pressure of 6,000 PSIG, and shall be built and tested to conform to NFPA 1901, 2003 edition.

g) The fill station fill whip(s) shall terminate in a high-pressure 4,500 psi, CGA-347 threaded SCBA connectors.

3.7.10 Containment Requirements

a) The front-loading, three (3) position containment fill station shall totally enclose the SCBAs or SCUBA cylinders during the refilling process.

b) The fill stations outer enclosure and door assemblies shall be constructed of formed ¼” thick plate steel.

c) Venting shall be provided in the bottom of the fill station to allow the rapidly expanding air from a cylinder rupture to escape from the filling station. d) The fill station shall be ergonomically designed for maximum operator convenience and safety during the refilling of cylinders. e) The fill station door and cylinder holder assembly shall tilt out towards the operator at an 89-degree angle, providing unobstructed access to the cylinder holder to load and unload cylinders.

f) A handle and heavy-duty gas spring shall be incorporated into the design of the filling station to assist the operator in opening and closing the fill station door.

g) It shall take approximately no more then eighteen pounds of effort to open or close the fill station door, thereby eliminating operator fatigue. h) Each cylinder holder shall be lined to prevent scuffing the outer surface of the cylinders being filled. i) The filling station shall include a safety interlock system that will prevent the refilling of cylinders unless the door is closed and secured in the lock position. j) The automatic interlock will require no actuation of secondary latching mechanism on the outside of the filling station. k) Three (3) 6,000-PSI fill hoses shall be located inside each filling station. l) Each fill hose shall be equipped with a bleed valve and CGA-347, or CGA-346 fill adapter. m) Fill hose retainers shall be provided to anchor the fill hose when not in use. n) The fill station shall require five (5) high pressure connections from the above mentioned fill panel:

i. one (1) high pressure connection to each fill position.

ii. one (1) from the panel mounted regulated outlet to the fill stations air actuated door interlock system. iii. one (1) return line to the panel to supply air to the fill position valves. o) A blow out patch must be installed in the floor of the fill station compartment to allow expanding air to escape from the fill station in the event of an SCBA cylinder rupture.

Page 49 of 55



PS05032


VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

3.7.11 Fill Station Control Panel

a) The fill control panel shall be installed on top of the filling station. b) The control panel shall be factory piped and designed to fill SCBA or SCUBA cylinders either independently or simultaneously and shall not add more then 6” to the overall height of the filling station. c) The control panel shall include the following standard features:

i. Inlet pressure gauge. ii. Adjustable pressure regulator. iii. Regulated pressure gauge. iv. Three (3) fill control valves. v. Three (3) fill pressure gauges.

d) One (1) relief valve for regulated fill pressure. e) Provisions for factory or field modification to allow a different fill pressure at each fill positionf) All piping and tubing shall be properly supported and protected to prevent damage from vibration in a mobile application, operation or maintenance. g) Piping and tubing shall be installed in a neat and orderly arrangement, adapting to the contours of the station. h) All instrument tubing shall be 300 series stainless steel. i) All control panel mounted pressure gauges shall be 2 ½” diameter and be liquid filled. j) All valves shall be soft seated metering valves for the safety of the operator. k) All panel-mounted components shall be labelled with an engraved nameplate.3.7.12 Air Compressor Control Panel

a) The panel shall be located on the right side of the filling station and not add more then 6” to the overall width of the filling station. b) The control panel shall include the following standard features:

i. Remote CO monitor display. ii. Compressor on/off switch. iii. Compressor master fault light. iv. Remote warning lights for Securus control. v. Emergency stop switch. vi. Storage inlet CGA fitting with check valve. vii. High pressure hose reel control valve with regulator and gauge.

3.7.13 High Pressure Brief Case Fill Station

a) There shall be one (1) complete portable three (3)-bottle filling station for use in remote locations in conjunction with a portable fragmentation shield. b) The high-pressure suitcase shall be constructed of injection moulded ABS plastic, safety yellow in colour and shall be equipped with a full o-ring seal to insure its protection from the environment.

c) The components inside shall consist of the following:

i. Inlet control valve.

Page 50 of 55



PS05032


VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

ii. Inlet pressure gauge. iii. High-pressure bleed valve. iv. Adjustable regulator from 1,000 to 6,000 PSI. v. Regulated pressure gauge. vi. Relief valve protecting secondary side of regulator. vii. Two (2) flexible 5' filling whips with bottle filling attachments, bleed valves and safety fill adaptersd) All of the above equipment shall be mounted on a (.062) zinc plate with water resistant brushed finish.e) The labelling and flow diagram shall be engraved into the mounting plate and shall be colour coded for ease of operation. f) The internal plumbing shall be done with (.049) seamless stainless steel tubing and stainless fittings. g) The entire system shall be designed with a minimum 4 to 1 safety factor.h) The mounting plate shall be made in two (2) pieces allowing the right side plate to be hinged creating a storage compartment for the two (2) filling whips with attachments.3.7.14 High Pressure Air Hose and Reel

a) The apparatus shall be equipped with one (1) air hose reel in exterior compartment. b) A Hannay 12 volt, electric rewind, 6,000-PSI air hose and reel, with 600 feet of hose supplied. c) The Inside diameter shall be 3/16" with an outside diameter of 13/32". d) The minimum bend radius shall be 1 1/2", with a working pressure of 6,000 lb. and a burst pressure of 24,000 lb. e) The 12-volt rewind electrical rewind circuit shall be directly wired to the chassis battery system with heavy-duty stranded copper cable that exceeds the standard requirements and resetable sealed circuit breaker. f) Each sealed push style rewind button shall be located adjacent to the air hose reel within easy access of operator, one (1) for each reel.g) Each air reel shall have a captive type, nylon roller assembly to permit air hose to feed directly off the reel and away from compartment. h) The air hose to have a ball clamp located near the end of hose.

i) The piping for the air hose reel shall be the same type of hose as specified on reel with threaded couplings.

j) The fitting on the end of the high-pressure air hose reel shall be a CGA-347 - high-pressure fitting. k) The air supply shall be from the mobile breathing air system. l) A reel shut-off valve, pressure regulator and 0-6,000 psi gauge shall be provided at air control panel.

3.7.15 Low Pressure Air Hose Reel

a) The apparatus shall be equipped with one (1) air hose reel in exterior compartment. b) Each air hose reel shall be a Hannay E1514-17-18 with 12-volt electric rewind. c) There shall be a red, 100-foot, Hannay 12 volt, electric rewind, 250-PSI air hose reel supplied. d) The Inside diameter shall be 3/8" with an outside diameter of 5/8".

Page 51 of 55



PS05032


VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

e) The minimum bend radius shall be 1 1/2", with a working pressure of 250 lb. and a burst pressure of 800 lb.

f) The 12-volt rewind electrical rewind circuit shall be directly wired to the chassis battery system with heavy-duty stranded copper cable. g) Each sealed rewind button shall be located adjacent to the air hose reel within easy access of the operator, one (1) for each reel.

h) The piping for the air hose reels shall be the same type of hose as specified on reel with threaded couplings.

i) Each air reel shall have a captive type, nylon roller assembly to permit air hose to feed directly off the reel and away from compartment. j) The air hose to have a ball clamp located near the end of hose. k) The air supply shall be from the mobile breathing air system.

3.7.16 Low Pressure Air Reel Controls and Equipment

a) The following equipment shall be located on a 3/16" aluminum panel next to air reel:

i. One (1) high pressure 0 - 150 psi. adjustable air pressure regulator . ii. One (1) air pressure gauge 0 - 150 psi., downstream of low pressure regulator. iii. One (1) air shut-off valve to reel.

3.8 Paint Process

3.8.1 Main Body Paint Process

a) The cab shall be painted two tone with the break line 1 ½” below the cab side windows and down to the top of the grill on the cab front fascia.

b) After the body and components have been fabricated and assembled they shall then be disassembled prior to painting so when the apparatus is completed there shall be finish paint beneath the removable components.

c) The apparatus body and components shall be metal finished to provide a superior substrate for painting.

d) All aluminum sections of the body shall undergo a thorough cleaning process followed by a complete rinse and a chemical conversion coating shall be applied to seal the metal substrate. e) The body and its components shall be primed with an epoxy primer and the seams shall be caulked. f) All bright metal fittings, if not available in stainless steel or polished aluminum, shall be heavily chrome plated. g) Iron fittings shall be copper under-plated prior to chrome plating.h) The body shall go through a three (3)-stage paint process, following the standards as set forth by PPG Fleet Finish Guidelines.

i. Primer coat. ii. Base coat. iii. Clear coat.

Page 52 of 55



PS05032


VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

i) A minimum of two (2) to three (3) coats of paint shall be applied to achieve hiding.j) In the final stage of the paint process the body shall be painted with a minimum of two (2) to three (3) coats of PPG DCU-2002 Clear Coat, to achieve a total dry film thickness of 2-3 mills.k) The painted body shall go through a baking process to achieve a complete coating cure on the finished product. l) The coated surface shall be sanded using 1000, 1200, and or 1500 grit sandpaper to remove surface defects.

m) The surface shall be buffed with 3m Super-duty compounds to add extra shine to coated surface; no more than .5 mil of clear coat shall be removed in this process.

Page 53 of 55



PS05032


VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

3.8.2 Apparatus Body Paint Colours

a) The apparatus bottom portion shall be painted with RED - PPG polyurethane enamel paint, # DBHS – 71096-ALT.

b) The apparatus top portion shall be painted with WHITE - PPG polyurethane enamel paint, # DUHS -2185.

c) One (1) four ounce bottle of each colour acrylic enamel touch-up paint shall be supplied.


A white reflective striping shall be applied to the exterior of the apparatus in a manner consistent with NFPA 1901 – 2003 or latest edition. The stripes shall conform to ASTM 4965, Standard Specifications for Retroreflective Sheeting for Traffic Control, Type III, Class 1 or Class 3. The length of stripe shall be 50% of the cab and body length of each side, 50% of the rear of the body, and 25% of the front width of apparatus. The reflective striping shall be 3M Scotchlite Diamond Grade and white in colour. It shall consist of a 1”, 4”, and a 1” wide stripe low across the front of the chassis and along the sides up to the first compartment on each side. It shall then angle up and back to a point above the wheel well area where it shall then run level to the back edge of the body. There shall be a 1” gap provided between each of the stripes. One (1) 6” wide stripe and two (2) 1” stripes shall be applied across the rear of the apparatus.


a) There shall be eighteen (18) gold reflective letters provided and installed on the front cab doors, the letters shall be approximately 4” tall with black outline and shadow, that read VANCOUVER and over a 14” VF&RS decal, that will be supplied by VF&RS.b) There shall be fourteen (14) gold reflective letters provided and installed on the on rear cab doors, the letters shall be approximately 4” tall with black outline and shadow that read ENGINE X, X will be determined, later in production. c) There shall be fourteen (14) white reflective, provided and installed on the centre of the front bumper and on the rear flexible vinyl hose bed flap, the letters shall be approximately 6” tall with black outline and shadow that read AIR & LIGHT 13.d) There shall be fourteen (14) white reflective letters painted on to an aluminum plates that are installed on to the left and right side of the cab roof, the letters shall be approximately 6” tall with black outline and shadow that read AIR & LIGHT 13. e) There shall be twenty four (24) gold reflective letters provided and installed on the installed on the rear rollup door, the letters shall be approximately 4” tall with black outline and shadow that read “Keep Back 150 metres” and AIR & LIGHT 13, in 4” white reflective lettering on black shading.

3.8.5 Undercoating

Page 54 of 55



PS05032


VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO


b) The first step shall be a rubberized polyurethane base compound, applied after the body has been primed.

c) The materials used shall incorporate unused paint products to reduce the amount of waste released into the environment. d) This coat shall be applied to all hidden pockets and surfaces that shall not be visible after completion. e) The entire underside of the body shall be coated with a rubber based automotive type undercoating when the apparatus is completed. f) Care shall be taken to avoid spraying the product on airlines, cables, or other items that would cause normal maintenance to be hindered

Page 55 of 55


The Supply of Fire ApparatusHazmat Units

PS05032

Proponents - do not write in this section

4.0 Detailed Equipment Specifications and Compliance Matrix4.1 CAB & COMPONENTS

Hazmat Units

4.1.1 Caba) The cab shall be aluminum bodied, Spartan Motors extended, four (4) door, long, flat floor, Advantage, with a 20" raised roof, fully enclosed tilt cab with an open interior and seating for three (3) fire fighters. b) The cab shall be specifically designed for the fire fighting service. c) The cab shall be painted two tone with a finished break line 1.5" below the cab side windows and down to the top of the grill on the cab front fascia. d) The cab construction shall have extruded box sections that provide maximum strength for safety. e) The rear cab wall shall be .090" thick aluminum and the cab front skin and floor shall be .190" thick aluminum. f) The cab design shall be tested to the standard ECE regulation – 29 test. g) Low profile cabs will not be accepted.

4.1.2 Cab Fascia

a) The front cab fascia shall have provisions for four (4) (Hi/Low Beam) headlamps, turn signal lamps and four warninglamps.

b) The front fascia shall allow access to check and fill the engine oil, power steering fluid and wiper washer fluid and provide access for servicing the windshield wiper motor and linkage, ember separator and electrical bulkhead connectors.

c) All engine fluid levels must be easily checked and filled without raising cab.

4.1.3 Cab Doors

a) The cab doors shall have flush, hidden, stainless steel door hinges. b) All doors shall be equipped with push button type with exterior latch locks that are designed to prevent accidental lockouts. c) All cab door locks shall be keyed a like. d) The interior door latches shall be flush, paddle type, incorporated into an upper door panel.e) The one piece inner door panel shall be texture painted with Zolotone paint in place of the standard vacuum formed upper and aluminum treadplate lower.

f) The lower cab door panels shall have 60 % of the surface covered with NFPA compliant reflective material and have a flashing warning LED light installed in each door panel.

4.1.4 Steps

Proponent to indicate whether they meet or exceed specification. Explain

in detail.

VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

Page 1 of 52



PS05032

Proponents - do not write in this section Proponent to indicate whether they meet or exceed specification. Explain

in detail.

VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO



4.1.5 Trim Band



a) Three (3) 18” three piece assist handles shall be installed, one (1) behind each cab door.


a) A one (1) piece, polished stainless steel front bumper shall be provided. b) The bumper shall be a 12” high, two (2) rib, wrap-around style. c) A 3/16” bright aluminum tread plate apron shall be installed between the bumper and the face of the cab.


a) Dual electric horns and Grover Stuttertone 24” air horns shall be supplied, recessed in the front bumper. b) 3/8” air supply lines, set equal distance from each horn shall be installed. c) The electric and or air horn actuation shall be accomplished by using the existing driver’s steering wheel contacts or right side officer’s push button switch.

4.1.9 Fog Lights

a) Two (2) clear rectangular fog/driving lamps shall be installed in the front bumper.

4.1.10 Backup Alarm and Disable Switch

a) An ECCO #575 backup alarm shall be installed at the rear of the chassis with an output level of not less than 107 dB. b) The alarm will automatically activate when the transmission is placed in reverse. c) An audible alarm shall be wired to the open door light, which will sound when a door is open, and the air brake is off with the vehicle in gear. d) There shall be a back-up alarm disable switch installed in the cab dash within reach of the driver.

Page 2 of 52



PS05032


in detail.

VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

e) The backup alarm, disconnect switch will automatically reset to sound the next time the transmission is placed in reverse

4.1.11 Tow Eyes

a) Two chrome plated tow eyes shall be installed below the bumper. b) The eyes shall be fabricated from ¾” thick hot rolled steel. c) The inside diameter of the eye shall be 2.00” and have a chamfered edge.


a) All vehicle lighting to meet the latest BC Motor Vehicle Act and Canadian Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Act requirements, as well as the requirements of NFPA 1901 – 2003 edition and the DOT standards at time of delivery.

4.1.13 Headlights


4.1.14 Cab Lights

a) Five (5) approved Light Emitting Diode (LED) cab marker lamps shall be installed on the Top front face of the cab above the windshield.

4.1.15 Turn Signals

a) Whelen model 60A00TAR amber LED programmable turn signals shall be mounted in polished cast 6EFLANGE brackets above the warning lamps.


a) Two (2) Whelen 400J000CR steady on cornering lamps with clear lenses, mounted in 4EFLANGE brackets shall be provided above the lower zone A red lights on the corners of the bumper.

4.1.17 Scene Lights

a) There shall be six (6) 27 degree, Whelen 900 series Optiscene lights installed on the main body, mounted in 7EFLANGE brackets. b) Two (2) lights shall be located on each side upper body and each controlled by separate switches and become illuminated only after the parking brake is engaged and on the side that a cab door is opened or after a switch on the main dash panel is turned on.

Page 3 of 52



PS05032


in detail.

VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

c) Two (2) lights shall be located on each side rear of the body and controlled by a switch at the rear door and become illuminated only after the parking brake is engaged

4.1.18 Engine Compartment Lights

a) There shall be four (4) light(s) installed in the engine compartment. b) An automatic switch shall activate the lights.


a) There shall be two (2) Whelen model 70A000TAR LED turn signal lights, in 7EFLANGE brackets installed in the rear wheel well area, one on each side of the body.


a) Weldon model 9185-40003 lights shall be mounted in a manner that illuminates all walkways and steps for safe operation of the apparatus. b) These lights shall become illuminated when the parking brake is engaged and after a dedicated switch on the main dash panel is turned on.

4.1.21 Tail, Turn Signal and Brake Lights

a) There shall be two (2) Whelen 600 series LED tail light assemblies installed on the rear of the apparatus.

b) Two (2) red 60J000R LED tail lights, two (2) amber 60TAR LED turn lights, and two (2) red 60R00XRR LED brake lights shall be supplied and the lights shall be mounted in cast 3 housings, one on each side of the apparatus.

4.1.22 Rear LED Clearance and License Plate Lights

a) Three (3) PAR 16 – T0R00FRR LED clearance lights shall be installed on the rear of the body.b) One (1) arrow # 437 chrome plated license plate light shall be installed on the lower rear corner of the apparatus.


a) There shall be one (1) Whelen model TAM870 “LED” Traffic Advisor installed on the apparatus. b) The traffic advisor shall be mounted above the rear face of the body, above the rear door. c) A controller for the Traffic Advisor shall be supplied and installed in the cab, in easy reach of the driver. d) The Traffic Advisor shall be wired into the emergency light package and to be activated with the Zone C upper lights,in a flash pattern.


a) A Whelen PAR00XRR LED brake/tail light shall be installed as an auxiliary brake light.

Page 4 of 52



PS05032


in detail.

VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

b) The light shall be installed as high as possible at the rear of the body, wired into the brake light circuit.


a) Two (2) Whelen 900 series work lights in housings shall be installed as high as possible at the rear of the body, wired with the back up lights above the tail light bezel on the left side. b) The switch shall be installed on the left rear face of the main body activate the work lights. c) The rear work light circuit shall be deactivated when the park brake is disengaged.


a) Weldon model 9185-40003 lights shall be installed beneath the apparatus in areas where personnel may be expected to climb on and off of the apparatus. b) The lights shall illuminate the ground within 30” of the apparatus and shall activate on the side that a cab door is opened.


a) The emergency warning light package shall meet or exceed the requirements for NFPA 1901 – 2003 edition. b) All emergency lights shall be controlled through a colour touch pad display in the centre multiplex console, within easy reach of driver. c) A notice of compliance that the emergency light package meets NFPA 1901 – 2003 edition shall be delivered with the apparatus.d) All clear LED lights are to deactivate when the parking brake is applied or in the “Blocking right of way mode”.


a) There shall be one (1) Whelen FN72QLED 72” long light bar installed on the forward section of the chassis cab roof.

b) It shall be equipped with two (2) forward facing linear red LEDs, two (2) forward facing, linear, two (2) corner, forward facing, linear, red LEDs and two (2) side facing linear red LEDs . c) The light bar shall be equipped with red and clear lenses on the front and sides.


a) Four (4) approved Whelen model 60R00FRR, red LED warning lamps shall be installed on the front of the cab in polished chrome housings mounted above the headlamps.


Page 5 of 52



PS05032


in detail.

VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

a) There shall be one (1) approved Whelen model 900 series, red LED warning lamps shall be installed on the main body in polished chrome housings mounted above compartment doors.


a) There shall be two (2) Whelen 60ROOFRR LED red, wide angle warning lights installed on the cab front radius to act as intersection lights. b) There shall be two (2) Whelen model 60R00FRR LED lights with 6EFLANGE brackets installed, one located in the rear wheel well, one (1) each side. c) There shall be two (2) Whelen model 60R00FRR LED lights with 6EFLANGE brackets installed in the lower, mid-point warning zone.


a) There shall be two (2) Whelen model 900 series LED's lights and two (2) Whelen model 900 series LED's lights installed high at the rear of the apparatus. b) The LED’s shall have red lenses.

c) The Traffic Advisor shall be wired into the emergency light package and to be activated with the Zone C upper lights.

4.1.33 Lower Zone C Warning Lights

a) There shall be one (1) Whelen model 60R00FRR LED light with 6EFLANGE brackets installed on each side of the lower warning zone C in Cast 4 housings.




4.1.35 Mirrors

a) There shall be two (2) RETRAC Model 1171H West Coast style mirrors provided. b) The full flat glass shall be heated, remotely controlled by switches on the dash. c) The mirrors shall be dual vision, motorized and heated with 7” x 16” mirrors and with an 8” convex mirror in the lower portion of the mirror heads. d) The mirror heads shall be mounted on stainless steel bow swing away type arms mounted to the cab doors.

4.1.36 Glass

a) All cab glass except the front windshield or the drivers or officers door glass shall be dark automotive tint applied in the glass. b) All cab glass shall be installed at the same height as the windshields.

Page 6 of 52



PS05032


in detail.

VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

c) Left and right windshield shall use the same interchangeable glass. d) The front and rear doors shall have a full roll down windows.


a) The entire cab shall tilt 45 degrees to allow for ease of maintenance. b) A remote control unit on a 25 foot long cord shall control electric over hydraulic, cab tilt actuation lift pump. c) The lift system shall have an ignition interlock and red lock down indicator lamp, which shall illuminate when holding the “down” switch to indicate safe road operation. d) It shall be necessary to have the master battery switch “on” and the park brake set in order to tilt the cab. e) Two (2) cab tilt cylinders shall be provided with a “velocity fuse” in each cylinder port. f) There shall be two (2) spring loaded hydraulic hold down hooks installed outboard of the frame for holding the cab securely to the frame. g) Steel safety “Tube” shall be installed on the right side, cab lift cylinder to prevent accidental cab lowering. h) The safety tube shall fall over the lift right side cylinder when the cab is in the “up” position and a cable release system shall also be provided to clear the safety tube from the lift cylinder when lowering the cab.


j) There shall be a manual, cab lift pump that is attached to the electric over hydraulic tilt pump provided. k) It shall be mounted in an enclosed box, with an outside door and latch, on the right side of the completed body in such a place as to be usable after the body and all equipment have been installed. l) A receptacle shall be provided to plug in the remote control and cord installed in the right hand side of the front bumper.

4.1.38 Cab Interior

a) The Interior cab volume and arrangement will be assessed by the VF&RS for acceptable placement of electronic communication equipment consisting of but not limited to, one mobile radio, one Mobile Data Terminal and one cellular phone. b) The cab interior shall be designed for extreme duty with the ABS header and dash trim eliminated. c) The cover shall incorporate a latching electrical access cover and the cover shall incorporate the integral rocker switch console. d) The interior metal surfaces of the cab shall be finish painted the standard job colour.e) A low rise fixed type engine cover shall be an integral part of the cab and made of aluminum.

Page 7 of 52



PS05032


in detail.

VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

f) The exterior shall be painted with a Zolotone texture finish and the underside of the cover shall be heavily insulated with 1" multi-layer foam with a non-conductive Mylar backing and held in place with adhesive and aluminum pins and retention caps.g) The sides, roof and rear wall of the cab shall contain a blanket of 1” thick multi-layered additional insulation to improve air conditioning and/or heating as well as reducing road noise. h) A glove box with a hinged door shall be provided in front of the officer’s seat. i) The interior metal surfaces of the cab shall be painted the same colour as the lower exterior colour.j) The flooring shall be a non slip vinyl covered, foam backed multi-layered, grey floor mat with sound deadener attached that meets the anti skid requirements of NFPA 1901 – 2003 edition. k) Two (2) coat hooks and four (4) helmet hooks shall be installed on the rear inside back wall.

4.1.39 Interior Lighting

a) One (1) 7” red dome lamp with switch shall be mounted in the headliner of the cab front to the left of the officer seat.

b) One (1) 7” clear dome lamp with switch shall be mounted in the headliner of the cab front to the left of the officer seat.

c) Two (2) 7” red dome lamps and two (2) 7” clear dome lamps with switches shall be installed in the crew area headliner inboard of the outer rear facing seats, the 7” dome lamps shall be door switch activated in addition to the push button switch.

d) Four (4) red/clear surface mount Whelen 50R03FRR LED flashing warning lights, each mounted in 5EFLANGEs with a 5BRUSH guard, one (1) shall be located in the moulded panel of each door and activated when the door is opened.

e) Two (2) light modules with dual map lights shall be located in the headliner, over the Driver.

f) A red flashing door ajar light Whelen 50R03FRR LED mounted in 5EFLANGEs and labelled “Do Not Move Apparatus” shall be centred in the headliner, wired to indicate an open door on the cab when the parking brake is released.

g) An audible alarm shall be wired to the open door light, which will sound when a door is open, and the air brake is off with the vehicle in gear.

4.1.40 Dash & Instrument Panel

a) The dash shall be ergonomically designed so that all controls and gauges are in the centre of the dash and easily accessible to the driver and able to be tilted for maintenance.

b) The instrument panel shall contain the following red backlit gauges and LED indicators, all within clear view of the driver.

Page 8 of 52



PS05032


in detail.

VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

c) One (1) electronic tachometer with integral digital hour meter. d) One (1) Metric over English Electronic speedometer. e) The speedometer shall include a digital odometer/trip odometer.f) One (1) three (3) function gauge with front air pressure, rear air pressure and fuel level. g) One (1) air application gauge. h) One ampere hour gauge.

i) One (1) four (4) function gauge with oil pressure, coolant temperature, transmission temperature and voltmeter.

j) The centre of the instrument panel shall contain a cluster of indicator lamps informing the driver of the following:

Red Lamps i. Low air system, one (1) primary and two (2) secondary. ii. Low engine oil pressure. iii. High engine coolant temperature. iv. High transmission temperature. v. Low coolant level. vi. Air filter restriction. vii. Low fuel level to activate at ¼ full. viii. Stop engine. ix. High or low voltage. x. Parking brake set.

Green Lamps

i. Directional indicators. ii. Auxiliary braking device active. iii.Low traction. iv. High idle active.

Yellow Lamps

i. Check engine. ii. Check transmission. iii. ABS brakes. iv. Water in fuel

Blue Lamp

i. High beam headlight on.

Audible Warning System for the Following:

i. Low air system. ii. Low engine oil pressure. iii. High engine coolant temperature. iv. Low coolant level. v. High transmission temperature. vi. High and low voltage. vii. Stop engine

4.1.41 Main Dash Switch Panel

Page 9 of 52



PS05032


in detail.

VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

a) The main rocker switch panel shall include fourteen (14) red LED backlit, labelled rocker switches. b) All emergency lights shall have individual back lit heavy duty rocker style switches, in the centre of the console, within easy reach of driver, wired through a master switch within that panel. c) The single row of switches shall be installed in the centre of the electrical housing on a hinged panel that includes 4 rocker switches on driver’s dash for:d) Secondary Braking On/Off switch. e) Secondary Braking Variance Control – High/Low. f) Spare. g) Spareh) There shall be a rocker switch on the main dash panel that will isolate the electric horns from the air horns, labelled “city/road”. i) The system will include inside and outside ambient temperature monitoring and “Climate control”. j) The left side of the panel shall contain a rocker type headlight switch with instrument lamp slide dimmer and intermittent windshield wiper/washer switch. k) There shall be a back-up alarm disable switch installed in the cab dash within reach of the driver. l) The backup alarm, disconnect switch will automatically reset to sound the next time the transmission is placed in reverse.


a) Intermittent electric wipers with a single motor and electric powered “wet arm” type windshield washers shall be provided.

4.1.43 Siren

a) There shall be a Whelen 295 HFSQ1 surface mount 12 volt Control with noise cancelling microphone, installed in a location decided by VF&RS at a pre construction meeting.

b) Siren control to be installed with a swivel base for easy access by driver and officer. c) A Whelen speaker model # SA122FMP2, shall be recessed in the front bumper on the driver’s side and to be easy removed for repair. d) The siren shall be highly RF immune. e) The siren shall meet the requirements of CSA J-1849.

4.1.44 Sun visors




4.1.46 Map Light

Page 10 of 52



PS05032


in detail.

VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO


4.1.47 Spot Light

a) A Collins Pulsar 500 hand-held spotlight with a momentary switch shall be supplied powered by a 12-volt supply, and shall be mounted to the right of centre of the engine tunnel. b) It shall have a coil-cord, a momentary switch and a 500,000 candlepower lamp.


a) The contractor shall install the three (3) mobile radios , laptop wiring and laptop mounting bracket(s).b) The contractor shall install the radio, GPS and MDT antennas supplied by the VF&RS on the cab roof.c) There shall be two (2) sets of circuit breaker protected wiring with 12 volt power, 12 volt signal (vbatt) and ground wires installed for the MDT and radio.


a) One (1) Sigtronics US-67-S intercom system with four (4) plug-in modules, five (5) headsets and all necessary equipment for two-way radio access and monitoring shall be installed in the following areas:

i. One (1) only US-67-S master station mounted in front cab area. ii. Two (2) in the cab for the driver and officer. iii. One (1) in the crew area. iv. One (1) at the rear of the body, left rear corner. b) All cables for installation will be Sigtronics cables. c) There shall be two (2) SE-2 SKPTT headsets c/w microphones supplied. d) There shall be three (3) SE-8 headsets c/w microphones supplied. e) There shall be two (2) Sigtronics portable radio adapters, suitable for Ericson “Jaguar” radios supplied.

4.1.50 12 Volt Power Supply

a) A 12-volt cigarette lighter type receptacle shall be provided in the cab dash on the officer’s side to act as a power source.

4.1.51 Map Console

a) There shall be a map console constructed of aluminum with a thermoplastic material finish installed in the chassis cab to be mounted in an area to be decided at the pre construction meeting. b) The console shall be approximately 9” tall, 13” wide and 10” deep. c) The console shall hold three (3) binders up to 2-1/2” thick each.

Page 11 of 52



PS05032


in detail.

VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

4.1.52 Seats Risers

a) The driver and officer seats shall have a raised aluminum box with a compartment built in, approximately 8.00” high x 16.25” wide x 17.38”. b) They should have a hinged doors and openings of approximately 6” high x 12.50” wide.

4.1.53 Drivers Seat

a) The driver seat shall be a 911 Seats Inc. model “ABTS” high back 6 way electric seat, with a mechanical suspension and a tapered/padded seat cushion. b) The seat back and bottoms shall be covered with an Imperial 1200 vinyl coated polyester material meeting SAE J-833. c) This seat shall be equipped with a red, integrated 3-point shoulder harness, lap belt and an automatic retractor built into the seat assembly.

4.1.54 Officers Seat

a) The driver seat shall be a 911 Seats Inc. model “ABTS” high back, air ride seat, with a mechanical suspension and a tapered/padded seat cushion.

b) The seat back and bottom shall be covered with Imperial 1200 vinyl coated polyester material, meeting SAE J - 833.

c) This seat shall be equipped with a red, integrated 3 point shoulder harness, lap belt and an automatic retractor built into the seat assembly.

4.1.55 Inner Assist Bars

a) One (1) black powder coated cast aluminum assist bars shall be provided and installed on the inside of the rear crew doors the full width of the window glass.


4.1.56 HVAC System

a) A HVAC system shall be provided consisting of a heater/defroster/air conditioning unit mounted in a central location with dash mounted controls. b) The condenser shall be roof mounted on the left side of the cab. c) The HVAC system should include forward facing louvers for defrosting the windshield and rearward facing louvers to direct air at the crew, at the driver and officer. d) The system should be able to produce 60,000 Btu’s of heat, 32,000 Btu’s of cooling and be capable of lowering the cab interior temperature from 100 degrees to 70 degrees within thirty minutes.


Page 12 of 52



PS05032


in detail.

VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

a) A permanent plate shall be mounted in the driver’s compartment on the seat riser specifying the quantity and type of the following fluids that may be used in the apparatus for normal maintenance. b) Where a fluid is not applicable to the unit, the plate shall be marked N/A to inform the service technician who may not be familiar with the apparatus. c) The following fluids as a minimum shall be listed on that plate: i. Engine oil. ii. Engine coolant. iii. Transmission fluid. iv. Drive axle fluid. v. Air-conditioning refrigerant. vi. Power steering fluid. vii. Cab tilt mechanism fluid. viii. Generator system lubricant.

d) A permanent plate shall be affixed, in plain sight of the driver that states the maximum number of personnel allowed riding on the apparatus at any time. e) A permanent plate shall be affixed, in the rear cab seating area, in plain sight of the crew that states “ALL OCCUPANTS MUST BE SEATED AND BELTED WHEN THE APPARATUS IS IN MOTION.”

f) A sign shall be affixed in the chassis cab, in plain sight of the driver that states the overall height of the apparatus.

g) All other appropriate labels to ensure safe operation of the apparatus shall be permanently affixed in conspicuous locations. h) A permanent plate shall be installed in the Driver's compartment which indicates the following: i. Filter Part Numbers for the Engine, Transmission, air and fuel systems. ii. Serial Number for the Engine and Transmission. iii. Delivered, certified weights of the front axle, rear axle and total completed weight. iv. Paint Code Brand and Codes. v. Body Builder Project Number.i) A red “HAZARD” warning light shall be supplied and installed that if the park brake is not engaged it automatically illuminates to warn the operator that: i. A passenger door is open. ii. An equipment rack is not stowed. iii. The light tower is extended. iv. The Work area slide out is out.j) The light shall be mounted in plain view of the driver and labelled “DO NOT MOVE THE APPARATUS WHEN THE LIGHT IS ON”.

4.1.58 Cab Resource Centre - Overhead Cabinet

a) There shall be two (2) overhead cabinets provided in the interior. b) The cabinets shall be constructed of 1/8" smooth finish aluminum, painted with a grey or black hammer tone powder coat.

Page 13 of 52



PS05032


in detail.

VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

c) Each cabinet shall be approximately 36" wide x 14" high x12" deep with sliding Lexan doors.

4.1.59 Filing Cabinets

a) One (1) three (3) drawer and one (1) two (2) drawer pedestal style cabinet with "K" type pull handle shall be provided and installed on each side of the deskb) Each cabinet shall have a keyed lock and painted black or putty. c) The cabinets shall be 15" wide x 28" high x 23" deep to fit under a 24" desk top. d) The bottom drawer of each cabinet shall be capable of storing 8 1/2" x 11" file folders.

4.1.60 Rear Cab "L" Shaped Desk

a) The rear portion of cab shall be provided with an "L" shaped desk extending from curbside to streetside directly behind driver and officer, and extending to rear wall of cab on the streetside. b) The desk shall be 24" deep and located approximately 30" from floor to desk top. c) The front edge of desk top shall be reinforced with 2" x 2" tubing to support a person sitting on edge of desk. d) The desktop surface shall be fabricated of 1/8" smooth finish aluminum with a 2" vertical back splash along back edge and a 2" vertical downward edge along front to cover the 2" x 2" reinforcement. e) 2-1/2" diameter holes with plastic edge grommet shall be provided at each rear corner for wiring of future equipment to be located on desktop. f) The desktop shall be painted with a grey or black, hammer tone powder coat.

g) There shall be a location for a computer tower located beneath the desk on the left hand side; alongside the drawers.

h) The computer monitor and keyboard to be located on the desktop. i) The monitor shall be mounted on a secure swivel type base. j) There shall be a printer, a fax machine and scanner will be also located and mounted on the desk surface. k) A cabinet on the left hand wall at the end of the desk top will contain the base radios for the unit.l) There shall be a heavy duty electrical surge protection system supplied for the computer and peripherals. m) The back area along the wall above the desk top and below the library will be covered ¾ of area with corkboard and the remainder with white board. n) A plug in and mounting for a “land line” phone and plug in for cell phone charger shll be located at the desk. o) The air conditioning and heater controls shall be located here. p) The roof top light mast will have the controls mounted inside the office area.

4.1.61 Interior Pedestal Seat

Page 14 of 52



PS05032


in detail.

VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

a) The apparatus body interior shall be provided with one (1) individual pedestal type seat. b) The seat shall be a Bostrom Sierra, swivel style pedestal, high back vinyl seat with 6" fore/aft adjustment.

4.1.62 Air Conditioner/Heater

a) The apparatus rear cab area shall be provided with one (1) 120 volt air conditioner/heater that is installed on body roof. b) The unit shall be an integral evaporator/condenser type with built-in heating elements. c) This A/C unit shall be rated at 13,500 BTU cooling capacity with a heating element rated at 5,600 BTU. d) This unit shall operate at a maximum of 1,800 watts on 120 volt single phase power. e) A variable speed fan shall supply a minimum of 305 cfm air flow capacity. f) The roof mounted air conditioner shall be approximately 13" high x 29" wide x 43" long. g) The opening in roof shall be properly reinforced to support air conditioner and be supplied with a 1" rise to minimize moisture condensation under the unit.

4.1.63 Shore Line – Air

a) One (1) air shoreline discharge connection shall be provided to provide air from the chassis air tank through the PP1 side supply.

4.2 Chassis and Driveline Components


a) All added equipment to the stock chassis, such as transmission, PTO, etc. are to be mounted in such a way as to allow for removal of each component, without requiring the cutting out of chassis cross members or other body or chassis reinforcements.


a) The overall size, weight and manoeuvrability of the finished apparatus is critical to the VF&RS, the bidder shall submit an outline including: overall length, width, height, wheelbase, turning radius, curb to curb, angle of approach & departure and all compartment sizes with the bid.

b) The weight of the miscellaneous equipment is to be evaluated by the bidder and a GVWR and GAWR shall be provided to safely carry the fully equipped apparatus. c) Weight distribution shall not load the vehicle in such a manner as to exceed any individual axle rating, spring or spring hanger rating or tire and wheel rating. d) Axles are to carry the weight distribution as per S.A.E. Axle loading recommendations. e) Certified axle weights and fully loaded apparatus weight to be furnished with each apparatus. f) VF&RS would prefer:

Page 15 of 52



PS05032


in detail.

VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

i. Maximum axle loading 16,000 lb. (7,250 kg.) for the front axle. ii. Maximum axle loading 21,000 lb. (10,725 kg.) for the rear axle.

4.2.3 Overall Length and wheel base of Completed Vehicle

a) The VF&RS desire to have the overall length of the vehicle be as short as possible, while providing space for the specified equipment, but not to exceed 425” (35.6’). b) The overall wheelbase of the vehicle shall be as short as possible, but not to exceed 227 ”.


a) The overall height of the vehicle shall be as low as possible, but not to exceed 144” when measured from the ground.

4.2.5 Front Axle

a) The front axle shall be an ArvinMeritor MFS –18 non-driving front steering axle with a 3.74” drop and a 71.00” KPI.

b) The capacity to be not less than 18,000 lb. GAWR. c) The front axle cramp angle shall be at least 50 degrees tothe left and a minimum of 44 degrees turning to the right, when using the 385/65R 22.5, 20 ply front tires.


a) The front axle wheel bearings shall be oil lubricated and the covers shall be Sentinel # STE – 348 4009 with an oil levelvisual inspection window.

4.2.7 Front Springs

a) The springs shall be an elliptical type, with four (4) or more leafs, each 54” long, 4” wide with a military double wrapped front eye. b) Both spring eyes shall have case hardened, threaded Horton bushings installed with lubrication counter bore and lubrication land off cross bore with grease fittings. c) The spring capacity shall meet or exceed the capacity of the front axle.

4.2.8 Front Wheels

a) There shall be three (3) front ALCOA Dura-Bright polished aluminum, hub piloted 10 stud disc 22.5 x 9.00 wheels. b) They will come complete with bright nut covers and hubcaps. c) The wheels shall be rated at 18,000 lb. and for use with radial tires.

4.2.9 Front Tires

Page 16 of 52



PS05032


in detail.

VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

a) There shall be three (3) Goodyear 385/65R 22.5 - 20 ply “L” tubeless radial G286 highway tread. b) The tires shall be rated as a minimum at 18,000 lb. at 110lb. air pressure.

4.2.10 Front Shock Absorbers



a) The steering column shall be a seven (7) position tilt and telescopic type. b) The steering wheel shall be a minimum 18” in diameter and covered with black absorbite padding. c) The steering wheel shall contain a horn button, self-cancelling turn signal switch, four-way hazard switch and the headlamp dimmer switch on turn lever.


a) The steering gear shall be a hydraulic power assisted, model TRW TAS-85 with a hydraulic, power assist cylinder.

b) A Vickers hydraulic power steering pump shall be gear driven from the engine. c) The steering ratio shall be 23.3:1 and have 6.2 turns stop to stop.


a) The rear axle shall be an ArvinMeritor model RS – 24 – 160 single reduction gearing. b) It shall have a rated capacity as a minimum of 24,000 lb. GAWR.c) The rear axle shall have Traction Control with a “mud and Snow” feature installed.d) The rear axle ratio to provide for maximum road speed of 90 km/h (55 MPH). e) The drive axles in the rear axle must be full floating and of sufficient size to transmit the full torque of the engine/transmission. f) The rear axle shall have oil lubricated wheel bearings.


a) The rear suspension shall be an Aero Glide air suspension with a single air bag on a tapered forged drop leaf spring with adjustable torque rods, with a rated capacity as a minimum of 24,000 lb. GAWR.

4.2.15 Rear Shock Absorbers


Page 17 of 52



PS05032


in detail.

VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

4.2.16 Rear Wheels

a) There shall be five (5) ALCOA Dura-Bright polished aluminum, hub piloted 10 stud disc 22.5 x 8.25 wheels with the correct outset.b) It shall be complete with bright nut covers and rear axle hub covers. c) The wheels shall be rated as a minimum at 24,000 lb. and for use with radial tires.

4.2.17 Rear Tires

a) There shall be five (5) rear tires shall be Goodyear 11R 22.5 16 PR “H” tubeless radial G164 traction tread. b) The tires shall be rated as a minimum at 23,000 lb. at 110 psi. air pressure.

4.2.18 Drive Shafts

a) The drive shafts shall be model 1710 with “glide coat” splines on all slip shafts.

4.2.19 Brakes

a) The brake system shall meet as a minimum, the testing requirement setout in NFPA 1901 – 2003 edition and SAE J - 992. b) A rapid air build up air brake meeting CMVSS – 121 system and in compliance with NFPA 1901 – 2003 edition shall be provided. c) It shall include air reservoirs with a total not less than 4,100 cubic inch capacity. d) The brake system shall be complete with:

i. Meritor Wabco anti-lock brake system on the front and rear axles. ii. An air compressor that produces a minimum of 18.7 CFMof air. iii. A primary and secondary air tank, separate air tank pressure gauges and an air gauge to indicate service brake applied pressure. iv. Manual water drain valves for each tank drain and each with an external pull cord extended to outside of body with individual identification. v. A 1200 cu. in. air reservoir installed and isolated to act as a supply tank for operating air equipment, plumbed with a 90 psi pressure protection valve on the reservoir supply side, that will cut off air supply to all accessories when ignition switch is off. vi. Front axle brakes that are ArvinMeritor EX225H disc type brakes with 15” vented rotors providing a total of 120 sq. in. of braking area.

vii. Rear brakes that shall be as a minimum ArvinMeritor 16.5" x 7" "S" cam type with Haldex automatic slack adjusters.

viii. Air operated spring brakes shall be fitted to rear axles to act as parking brake as well as emergency brake during low air pressure, with the controller mounted within easy reach of the driver and officer.

Page 18 of 52



PS05032


in detail.

VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

4.2.20 Auxiliary Brakes


4.2.21 Air Dryer

a) A model WABCO System Saver 1200 air dryer with a replaceable, spin on desiccant cartridge and automatic heated moisture ejector shall be installed with easy access for maintenance and draining.


a) A dual air system plumbed with colour coded, reinforced, nylon tubing airlines shall be installed. b) The primary (rear) brake line shall be green, the secondary (front) brake line shall be red, the parking brake line, orange and the auxiliary outlet shall be blue. c) Brass compression type fittings shall be used on the nylon tubing. d) All drop hoses shall be fibre reinforced neoprene covered hoses.


a) The air tanks shall be installed one (1) inch inboard of the frame rails.

4.2.24 Vogel Lubrication Systems

a) A Vogel, Lubrication system shall be installed on the chassis. b) The systems shall be capable of lubricating 22 grease points on the chassis.

4.2.25 Frame

a) The frame shall be made of heat treated, alloy steel, frame rails with inner liner and sufficient cross members to provide a strong torsion resistant frame assembly. b) All cross members to be bolted to main rails, bolting to take place through web section of main rails. c) Frame rail spacing shall be 34” outside, North American Standard.d) The frame side rails shall be a channel type with a minimum dimensions of 10 ¼” x 3 ½” x 3/8”. e) The frame material shall have yield strength of not less than 110,000 psi. f) There shall be a minimum of seven (7) fully reinforced bolted in cross members installed, the bolts will be a grade 8 or better. g) The frame and running gear of the chassis shall painted with a standard black paint. The frame paint shall be applied before airlines and electrical wiring is installed.

Page 19 of 52



PS05032


in detail.

VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

h) There shall be a lifetime warranty on frame and cross members.

4.2.26 Frame and Axle Alignment

a) The chassis frame rails shall be cross checked for length and squareness. b) Front and rear axles shall be laser aligned. c) Tires and wheels shall be aligned and toe-in set on front tires at the chassis manufacturer's facility. d) The completed apparatus should be rechecked for properalignment after the chassis has been fully loaded.


a) On Spot automatic tire chains shall be installed on the rear axle of the chassis. b) The system shall include a switch on the dash with protective cover.

4.3 Engine, Transmission and Accessories

4.3.1 Engine

a) An in-line six (6) cylinder, 4 cycle, turbocharged, charge air cooled engine, with 370 horsepower @ 1900 to 2200 rpm, with a torque of 1200 ft. lb. @ 1300 rpm with the latest version of electronic control unit shall be provided.

b) The Electronic Speed Control shall be equipped with Electronic Controls to maintain a stable cycle output from generator. c) The governor system shall be activated after the vehicle parking brake is applied and the transmission selector is placed in neutral. d) Engine Lubrication to be a combination 100% full pressure with two (2) full flow oil filters, one (1) primary full flow, one (1) secondary full flow and one (1) Raydan by-pass filter. e) Both full flow filters shall be spin on style. f) The Crankcase pan is to be shaped to allow for operationon grades up to 20%.

4.3.2 Engine Brake

a) An engine compression brake, for the six (6) cylinder engine, with brake light actuation. b) Dash mounted, engine compression brake "On/Off" and High/Medium/Low switches shall be installed.c) The engine brake will activate upon release of accelerator when in operation mode and work in conjunction with the transmission downshift schedule to increase the auxiliary braking systems performance.d) The chassis brake lights shall activate when the compression brake is actuated and the on/off switch for the compression brake is “On”.

Page 20 of 52



PS05032


in detail.

VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

e) The WABCO anti lock brake system shall be interfaced with the engine compression brake and transmission in such a manner that if there is an ABS event, the anti lock brake system assumes authority/priority and discontinues the secondary braking system until the ABS event is finished.

4.3.3 Automatic Engine Alarm a) An automatic engine alarm for low oil pressure or high coolant temperature shall be installed and displayed on the dashboard.. b) Alarm to be audible above engine noise.


a) An air intake flapper valve shall be mounted between the turbocharger intake and the air cleaner, a reset lever shall be provided on the flapper assembly that shall be accessible without tilting the cab. b) One (1) emergency shut down controls is required, in the cab within easy reach of the driver.

4.3.5 Starter

a) A heavy-duty 12 volt electric starter shall be supplied, as per the requirements of NFPA 1901 – 2003 edition.

4.3.6 Alternator

a) A Leece Neville 270 amp, 12 volt alternator shall be provided.b) The alternator shall supply a minimum of 100 amps at engine idle. c) Alternator shall have a dual, ½” V belt drive or equal installed to provide power transfer with no belt slippage at full power demand. d) A heavy-duty, remote mounted, transistorised voltage regulator shall be supplied and installed in a cool location.

4.3.7 Drain plugs




b) The radiator shall be located below the charge air cooler to allow a single depth core and efficient cooling system designed to maintain cooling during all fire fighting conditions, with a minimum 1200 sq. in. frontal surface area.

c) The radiator shall have a complete de-aeration system capable of removing entrapped air from the system and equipped with a drain cock to drain the coolant for serviceability.

Page 21 of 52



PS05032


in detail.

VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

d) The cooling system shall be equipped with a separate expansion tank that allows the system to be filled and will include a low coolant probe and a sight glass to monitor the coolant level. e) The cooling system shall have a “Fully Formulated Antifreeze” installed as per engine manufacturer’s specifications and Supplemental Coolant Additive as a backup to the Fully Formulated Antifreeze if required. f) Silicone radiator and heater hoses with stainless steel constant torque clamps shall be used though out the cooling system. g) A low engine coolant indicator light and alarm shall be provided. h) The cooling system shall have sufficient capacity to keep the engine properly cooled under all conditions of vehicle operations. i) The cooling system shall be designed to meet or exceed the engine and or transmission manufacturer and EPA requirements.

4.3.9 Charge Air Cooler

a) There shall be a charge air cooler of a cross-flow design constructed completely of aluminum with welded side tanks.

b) The charge air cooler shall be located above the radiator to allow a single depth core and efficient cooling system.

c) The charge air system shall be installed with silicone hoses with stainless steel “T” style clamps.

4.3.10 Cooling System Fan

a) The engine cooling system shall incorporate an air override thermostatically controlled heavy-duty fan that shall be installed on the engine. b) Recirculation shroud shall be installed. c) There shall be an emergency override switch installed on the centre console.


a) The exhaust system shall be installed to discharge below frame rails on passenger side of the apparatus or to be determined at the pre-build conference.

b) Exhaust shall be 5” diameter pipe and exit at a 90 degree angle on the horizontal in front of the right rear duals.

c) Stainless steel flex tubing is to be installed between exhaust pipe and muffler. d) The system joints shall be connected with lapping band clamps. e) The exhaust system shall accept a Neiderman 45 degree exhaust extraction system.


Page 22 of 52



PS05032


in detail.

VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

a) A primary fuel filter with electric fuel primer pump shall be provided and be activated by a fuel primer momentary switch located on a panel under the dash. b) A check valve and by-pass system shall be installed for normal draw of fuel for the engine fuel pump. c) A 10 micron, spin on secondary fuel filter or a manufacturer approved equal shall be provided. d) A fuel shut off valve shall be installed in the fuel draw line at the primary fuel filter to allow the fuel filter to be changed without loss of fuel to the fuel pump, fuel filters located for easy access.

4.3.13 Fuel Tank

a) The fuel tank shall have a capacity of fifty (50) IG’s. b) The fuel tank shall be mounted under the frame, behind the rear axle on strap style hangers bolted at the front and rear. c) The tank shall have a vent port to facilitate rapid filling without “blow-back” and have a roll over check ball with separate vent. d) There shall be a removable access plate in the main body to allow the fuel sender to be removed. e) A 2” NPT fill ports on the left side of the tank shall be installed and available for left hand fill. f) A ½” NPT drain plug shall be installed centred in the bottom of the tank. g) Steel wire braid reinforced rubber supply and return hoses with reusable fittings shall be installed between the fuel tank and engine.

4.3.14 Air Filter

a) The air cleaner shall be a Farr # 62891-001 dry type with a replaceable element. b) The air cleaner shall have an outside air intake with an ember separator filter and an air restriction warning indicator light in the instrument cluster to show when the air cleaner element requires replacement. c) An air restriction indicator gauge will be mounted on the dash panel, it shall provide a graduated scale/colour coded warning indication of a clogged air filter. d) Air pickup for the air cleaner to be external from engine compartment and positioned not to pick up rainwater or road splash water.

4.3.15 Transmission

a) The transmission shall be an Allison 5 speed automatic transmission, model 3000 EVS. b) There shall be an Allison, pressure sensitive, range selector, touch pad provided, located on the engine compartment, on the right side of the driver, in clear view and easy reach. c) The transmission shall be programmed with a “mode” function for fourth gear hold-in. d) The transmission, upon start-up, will select four (4) speed operation, by pressing the "mode" switch on the shift pad (mode on) provides five (5) speed overdrive.

Page 23 of 52



PS05032


in detail.

VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

e) The transmission shall be filled with transynd synthetic fluid. f) The transmission shall have two (2) internal oil filters. g) The transmission cooler shall be mounted in a manner to allow maximum approach angle by not protruding below the frame more than an inch. h) The transmission cooler shall be constructed completely of aluminum with welded side tanks.

4.4 Electrical Systems


a) A single 12 volt, starting system shall be installed per the requirements of NFPA 1901 – 2003.

b) The starting system shall be supplied with the following:

i. One (1) Cole-Hersee # 2484 master battery switch. ii. One (1) Cole-Hersee # EX26654A ignition switch c/w keyless ignition and starter button. iii. One (1) starter button. iv. One green LED indicator for battery “on”. v. One green LED indicator for ignition “on”.

4.4.2 Batteries

a) There shall be six (6) group 31- 950 CCA maintenance free 12 volt batteries with minimum 210 minute reserve capacity, suppressed as per SAE J - 551. b) The batteries shall be mounted so that the batteries can be checked. c) 3/0 welding type dual path, heavy-duty battery cables with soldered type cable ends, as per SAE J-541 shall be used. d) Battery boxes are to be covered with a cover and lined onthe bottom with anti-acid coating and having drain holes for washing the trays out.



4.4.4 Battery Charger and Conditioner

a) One (1) Kussmaul Auto Charge Model # 35/10, 35 amp battery charger and 10 amp battery conditioner shall be installed in the cab, behind the driver’s seat. b) The battery charger shall incorporate a 10 amp Battery Saver with a battery saver filter to provide a clean filtered 12 volt power supply for a mobile data terminal, radio and rechargeable hand held lights.

Page 24 of 52



PS05032


in detail.

VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

c) The battery charger and conditioner shall be supplied power by the main 120 volt shoreline, connected to a 120 volt/20 amp receptacle, Hubbell - HBL6331CN, with a spring loaded snap cover, located on the cab corner in front of the driver’s door. d) The battery charger shall have a switch for selection of an operational voltage selection.e) When in the AC position it shall operate from the shoreline.f) The remote charge indicator shall be located in the cab on the left side of the dash and shall be viewed through the bottom of the left windshield.


a) The main electrical panel shall be located in a highly weather resistant box. b) The panel shall contain a board with permanent sockets for relays, diode blocks, and using automatic reset circuit breakers. c) Three harnesses shall feed the main electrical panel, one for the cab, one for the main harness from the body.

d) The main body harness shall be connected to individual compartment harness’s and shall have a minimum of 10 spare wires, complete from one end of the harness to the other.

e) All 12 volt wiring running from the front to the rear of the apparatus shall be run in a full length electrical wiring raceway that is down both sides of the apparatus.f) An apparatus wiring panel, constructed of aluminum with an abraded finish shall be installed on the officer side bulkhead, below the dash and shall include a minimum of seven (7) spare circuits:

i. One (1) 30 amp. ii. Three (3) 20 amp. iii. Three (3) 15 amp.

g) Three (3) 15 amp relays and breakers with trigger wires to the rocker switch panel. h) All bulkhead connectors shall be physically attached to the box in such a way as to afford easy access to the connectors. i) The connectors shall be the Deutsche series, with sealing plugs for any sockets not containing a wire. j) An “O” ring seal shall be an integral feature of the bulkhead connectors to eliminate the chance of water entering the connection and causing corrosion. k) At any place where the harness or sub-harness passes through metal, heavy grommets shall be installed. l) All sockets relays and equipment shall be clearly labelled. m) Any circuit, which draws 15 amperes or more, shall be switched through relays. n) Individual loads shall be wired to individual automatic reset circuit breakers. o) The circuit breakers shall be sized for the individual loads.

Page 25 of 52



PS05032


in detail.

VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

p) There shall be two (2) sets of 12 volt power and grounding studs shall be provided and installed behind the electrical centre cover for mobile radio and Mobile Data Terminal. q) A 40 amp self resetting circuit breaker will be located at the batteries for circuit protection.

4.4.6 Wiring Harnesses

a) Wiring harnesses shall be the automotive type, engineered specifically for the builder’s apparatus and under no circumstances shall diodes, resistors, or fusible links be located within the wiring harness. b) All components shall be located in an easy to access wiring junction box or the main circuit breaker area. c) All wire shall meet the white book, baseline, advanced design transit coach specification and Society of Automotive Engineers recommended practices. d) It shall be stranded copper wire core with cross-linked polyethylene insulation complying with SAE specification J -1128.

e) Each wire shall be colour coded and hot stamped with its number and function every three inches, starting one inch from the end and continuing throughout the entire harness.

f) All terminals on the ends of the wiring harness shall be soldered unless a machine is used that gives an even and precise pressure for the terminal being used and all terminals given a adequate pressure pull test to insure their integrity.

g) Circuits shall be provided for multiplexed gauges, hand throttle, high idle switch. h) A circuit for a J - 1939 data link shall be provided at the dropout.


a) The apparatus shall be equipped with a V– MUX, Multiplex Management system, NO EXCEPTIONS.

b) The Multiplex system shall be of a “Peer to Peer “ type.

c) The modules shall have the ability to use Pulse Width Modulation at the outputs.d) The system shall be able to detect a short or open condition and report the problem in “real time”, by text based message(s). e) The system shall have the ability to control the HVAC system and be an integral part of the Multiplex system. f) The system shall have the ability to shed electrical loads at least to eight (8) different voltage levels and assign a level to any or all outputs. g) The system shall have the ability to sequence electrical loads from 0 to 8 levels on any load(s). h) The system shall be able to flash any output in either an A or B phase and use a logic signal to shut down needed outputs when in park, or any one of several combined interlocks.

Page 26 of 52



PS05032


in detail.

VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

i) The flash rate can be selected at either 80, or 160 FPM., flashing outputs can also be used to warn of problems.

j) The inputs shall have the ability to switch by a ground or vbatt signal. k) The inputs shall be filtered for noise suppression via hardware and software so that RF or dirty power will not trick an input into changing its status.

l) There shall be a display that will be able to provide real time information regarding load shedding and system status, such as network traffic/errors or shorts and open circuits.

m) The Multiplex system shall be able to perform in extreme temperature conditions, from – 40° to + 85° C (-40° to +185° F). n) The system shall be sealed against the environment, moisture, humidity, salt or fluids such as diesel fuel, motor oil or brake fluid. o) The modules shall be protected from over voltage and reverse polarity.p) There shall be no” added modules”, the module with the output signal shall perform the function. q) A multiplex electrical system shall be supplied that shall include the following:

i. Dash mounted information centre with a 6”H x 4”W Vista colour screen display. ii. Systems diagnostic menu and controls. iii. Solid state switching. iv. Peer to Peer network architecture. v. Weatherproof Nodes. vi. Must comply with SAE J-1939 protocols.

4.4.8 110 Volt/220 Volt Wiring Systems

a) The complete wiring and electrical installation shall conform to present National Electrical Code and the requirements of NFPA 1901 – 2003 edition.

b) The wiring, electrical fixtures and components shall be to the highest industry quality standards available on the market.

c) The equipment shall be the type as designed for mobile type installations subject to vibration, moisture, and severe continuous usage. d) The electrical components and wire shall exceed the minimum acceptable standard for this type of apparatus. e) All electrical wiring shall be fine stranded copper type THHN, sized to load and circuit breaker rating. f) Wiring shall be colour coded and printed with function every 3" for easy identification. g) All 120/240 volt wiring in the apparatus body shall be through flexible moisture resistant reinforced conduit, with proper seal tight connectors and hardware.

h) All circuit breakers shall be labelled as to usage, with metal engraved or plastic coded labels shall be provided for allexterior and interior outlets indicating output amperage.

i) Two (2) "As Built" electrical wiring diagram schematics will be supplied with the completed apparatus.

Page 27 of 52



PS05032


in detail.

VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

j) The entire 120/240 volt electrical system shall be installed in compliance with the requirements of NFPA 1901 – 2003 and done in accordance with CSA, and City of Vancouver’s electrical codes. k) This shall include all testing, labelling, wiring methodology, and dimensional requirements. l) Certification of compliance shall accompany the apparatus at the time of delivery.

4.4.9 Shore Power

a) A 30 ampere, 120 volt, single phase shore power receptacle shall be provided on the apparatus to provide an external power source for apparatus electrical circuits. b) A matching 30 ampere plug shall be shipped with the apparatus for Fire Department supplied external power source wiring. c) The receptacle shall be located on the curbside of the vehicle, placed for easy access. d) Shore power shall be wired to the specified 120 volt, 20 ampere electrical circuits on apparatus.e) These circuits shall be provided with circuit breaker protection with either generator or shore power providing power. f) To protect both the generator and external power source from back feed, a 120 volt, 25 ampere, 4PDT power relay shall be installed. g) The relay shall cut-off the connection between the generator supply circuit and device circuits when shore power is connected. h) There shall be an automatic transfer relay to provide power from both the shore power inlet and generator to the interior outlets to keep all monitoring equipment charged and provide stationary lighting while in the fire hall.

4.4.10 Load Centre, Outlets and Circuits

a) There shall be a 120/240 volt load centre incorporated into the 120/240 volt wiring system. b) The load centre shall include adequate circuit breakers to protect the loads specified for this apparatus. c) The circuit breaker box shall be a 3 phase Cutler Hammer with cover and circuit breakers rated to the wire size and load demand. d) The generator shall supply the electrical equipment and outlets with wiring to circuit breaker box. e) There shall be two (2) 120 volt exterior outlets, one (1) each side near rear wheel well area, the outlets will be 120 volt, 20 amp twist lock style Hubbell - HBL6331CN. f) Each outlet shall be protected by a 20 amp circuit breaker/ g) Each outlet shall be protected by a 20 amp circuit breaker. h) Two (2) 120 volt straight blade outlets located inside walk in area, the outlets will be 120 volt, 15 amp straight blade style. i) Each outlet shall be protected by a 15 amp circuit breaker.

Page 28 of 52



PS05032


in detail.

VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

j) The 120/240 volt electrical load centre shall be located front of body above Compartment R1. k) Two (2) 120 volt electrical outlets at front countertops, one (1) located above Compartment R1, and one (1) above Compartment R2.

4.4.11 Over current Protection

a) Over-current protection devices shall be provided for circuits in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 1901 – 2003 edition. b) The load centre shall be equipped with a non GFI two pole main breaker. c) Over current protection devices shall be marked with labels to identify the function of the circuit they protect.

4.4.12 Electric Cable Reels

a) The apparatus shall be equipped with one (1) electric cable reels in exterior compartments as noted under each compartment description section. b) The cable reel shall be a Hannay ECR1616-17-18 with electric rewind, equipped with fully enclosed 30 amp, three (3) conductor collector rings. c) The 12 volt reel rewind system shall be directly wired to the chassis battery system with heavy duty stranded copper wire, with guarded finger type rewind button located within easy reach of the operator.

d) The wiring from the generator system shall be through electrical weatherproof conduit, with stranded copper wiring.

e) The wiring shall terminate in a sealed conduit box at the reel with mechanical type connectors for quick removal of wiring.

f) Each cable reel shall have a captive type, nylon roller assembly to permit cable to feed directly off the reel and away from compartment and a ball clamp located near end of cord.

g) One (1) 120 volt circuit for each 120 volt electric cable reel with a 30 amp circuit breaker protection for each circuit.

h) The reel shall be equipped with 200’ of yellow STW Seoprene 105 degree Celsius 10/3 wire installed with a twist-lock female Hubbell - HBL6331CN plug at the end.

4.4.13 Junction Boxes

a) There shall be two (2) Extenda-Lite model EJB-CS backlit electrical GFI junction boxes, equipped with four (4) electrical receptacles, two on each side.b) Each junction box shall be equipped with a bracket that shall be installed on a compartment wall to store junction box when not in use. c) The outlet(s) will be 120 volt, 20 amp twist lock style. Hubbell twist 4710 cn, Twistlock.d) Each outlet shall be protected by a 20 amp circuit breaker.

Page 29 of 52



PS05032


in detail.

VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

e) Each receptacle shall be equipped with a spring loaded snap cover and pre-wired with a 1' pig tail with twist lock male plug for the cast aluminum junction box to supply power to the four receptacles. f) An extension cord shall be connected to the junction box through a heavy duty water resistant strain relief and flexible extender. g) Each side of the junction box shall be fitted with polypropylene faceplates that are backlit, so that plug orientation to the receptacles is quick and easy to align.

4.4.14 Light Tower

a) The apparatus shall be equipped with one (1) Command Lights CL 615 – 6 X 1500 Watt, all electric, all weather, continuous 360 degree rotation, light tower with an auto park and back light feature. b) The unit shall not require tapping into vehicle braking system to be operated. c) Hydraulic or pneumatic type floodlights are not acceptable. d) The light bank shall have six (6) weatherproof 1,500 watt, 240 volt quartz halogen lights. e) The Light heads shall be mounted in two (2) rows of three (3) lights in the upright position. f) Power for light bank shall be transmitted through power collecting rings thus allowing 360+ degrees rotation in either direction, NO EXCEPTIONS. g) Positioning of the light bank shall be accomplished with maintenance free, heavy duty 12 volt linear actuators. h) The Command Lights assembly shall be all aluminum construction, with stainless steel shafts and bronze bushings for long life and low maintenance. i) Light tower shall be controlled with a hand-held umbilical line remote control with an "Auto-Park" automatic nesting feature. j) Command Light controls shall feature:

i. One (1) switch for each light bank. ii. One (1) light bank rotation switch. iii. One (1) switch for elevating lower stage. iv. One (1) switch for elevating upper stage. v. One (1) indicator light to indicate when light bank is out of roof nest position. vi. One (1) indicator light to indicate when light bank is rotated to the proper nest position.

vii. One (1) "On/Off" switch for the top mounted strobe light

k) The light tower shall have a full extension of 10' - 6" from mounted position and shall extend from nested position to full upright in 20 seconds. l) The overall size of the nested light tower shall be approximately 40" wide x 73" long x 12-3/4" high. m) A flashing warning light shall be provided in cab, indicating when a light tower is not in nested position. n) The operational envelope of the mast shall be automatically illuminated whenever the mast assembly is being raised, lowered, or rotated.

Page 30 of 52



PS05032


in detail.

VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

o) A red strobe light shall be supplied with the Command Light and mounted at its highest position. p) The light tower shall be installed on the roof of the cab, on the right side with a protective shroud. q) The light controller shall be located on the back of the front desk back, in a location to be decided by the VF&RS at the pre construction meeting.

4.4.15 Rear Tripod Telescopic Floodlights

a) Two (2) Fire Research - Focus 500 watt 120 volt quartz tripod floodlights shall be provided on the rear of the apparatus body. b) The lights shall have twist lock plugs, Hubbell - HBL6331CN and there shall be a matching twist lock outlet near the mounting location of the light. c) The telescoping floodlights shall have hand tightening locking device to secure the floodlight at any level and to revolve in any 360 degree position.

d) There shall be an "On/Off" switch on the light head.

e) The floodlights shall be protected with circuit breakers rated at the proper amperage and wire size.

4.4.16 Engine Tachometer & Hour Meter


4.4.17 Refrigerator

a) There shall be one (1) Norcold DE-441R 120VAC/12VDCrefrigerator/freezer combination installed in a compartment designed for it in an location to be determined at the pre construction meeting.b) The refrigerator shall be able to operate on either 120 VAC or 12 VDC power.

4.4.18 Uninterruptible Power Supply

a) There shall be a Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) that would keep the computer systems running for a minimum of three (3) hours.

4.5 Main Body Module

4.5.1 General

a) The fabrication of the sheet metal for the body module shall be by formed or bend and break construction and all attachment points shall be heavily reinforced. b) To extend the expected service life of the vehicle, the body module shall be removable from the chassis frame, and be able to be installed on a new chassis.

Page 31 of 52



PS05032


in detail.

VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

c) The apparatus body shall be constructed of a minimum of 3/16” 3003 H14 Marine Grade, smooth aluminum plate, this shall include compartment front panels, vertical side sheets, side upper rollover panels, rear panels and compartment door frames. d) The body compartment floors and exterior panels shall be constructed with not less than 3/16" (.187) aluminum 3003H-14 smooth plate. e) Interior compartment dividing walls shall be constructed with not less than 1/8" (.125) aluminum 3003H-14 smooth plate. f) Lighter gauge sheet metal will not be acceptable in these areas. g) The apparatus body shall be designed to provide maximum storage of equipment and other accessories outlined in these specifications. h) Anodized aluminum angle scuff plates shall be installed in the bottom sill area of all compartments and attached using a permanent bonding method. i) All side body compartments shall have sweep out type floors. j) There shall be a removable stainless steel cover to provide access to the fuel tank gauge sending unit without the need to remove the fuel tank. k) The door side frame openings shall be formed "C" channel design. l) An electrical wiring conduit raceway running the full length of exterior compartments shall be provided. m) This raceway shall contain all 12 volt wiring running to therear of the apparatus. n) Dead air space voids between compartments will not be an acceptable method of compartment construction. o) The compartment floors shall have a "sweep-out" design with door opening threshold positioned lower than compartment floor.

p) The air bags will be located in a custom built module in a side compartment or stowed in an under body slide out tray.

q) The air tools and air bag regulators to be stored in a portable, heavy duty plastic toolbox in same area as the airbags. r) There will be storage cylinders located around the wheel wells for spare SCBA air bottles. s) There shall be a 10 to 12 drawer mechanics tool chest with slide out trays provided and mounted in the rear section of the main body. t) All seams in sheet metal below frame and around the rear wheel well area shall be welded continuous to prevent moisture from entering compartments. u) All other interior seams and corners shall be sealed with silicone based caulk prior to painting. v) Where bolted construction is used, slot-head, flush-type DZUZ Fasteners with “vibra tape” or anti vibration solution applied. w) All interior access covers, back or side panels that are installed inside compartments where maintenance of hidden components will be required, shall be held in place by Hansen #46 small door fasteners with “vibra tape” or anti vibration solution applied.

Page 32 of 52



PS05032


in detail.

VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

x) Metal screws or self-tapping screws or “pop rivets” shall not be used in any part of the apparatus.

4.5.2 Body Mounting and Subframe

a) To assure proper body alignment and clearance, the body subframe shall be constructed directly on the chassis.

b) The chassis frame rails shall be fitted with 5/16” x 2” fibre reinforced rubber to isolate the body frame members from direct contact with chassis frame rails. c) The body subframe shall be constructed from 6061T6 aluminum alloy tubing, consisting of two (2) 2” x 6” x 1/4” aluminum tubes the same width as the chassis frame rails and welded to this tubing shall be cross members of 2” x 6” x 1/4” aluminum. d) The cross members shall extend the full width of the body to support the compartments. e) Crossmembers shall be located at front and rear of the body, below compartment divider walls, and in front and rear of wheel well opening. f) Additional aluminum crossmembers shall be located as necessary to support walkway or heavy equipment.

g) The body subframe shall be fastened to the chassis frame with a minimum of six (6) spring loaded body mounts.

h) Each mount shall be configured using a two piece encapsulated slide bracket. i) The two (2) brackets shall be fabricated of heavy duty 1/4” thick steel and shall have a powder coat finish to prevent any corrosion. j) Each mounting assembly shall utilize two (2) 5/8” diameter x 6” long grade L9 bolts and two (2) heavy duty springs.

k) The assembly design shall allow the body and subframe to act as one (1) component, separate from the chassis.

l) The spring loaded body mounts shall also prevent frame side rail or body damage caused by unevenly distributed stress and strains due to load and chassis movement.

m) Body mountings that will not allow relief from chassis movement will not be acceptable.

4.5.3 Body Height Measurements

a) The body shall be 98-1/2” high, not including any underbody rub rails or running boards. b) Full height compartments shall have a useable interior height of approximately 63 1/2” outside of the chassis frame rails. c) Over the wheel well compartments shall have an approximate useable interior height of approximately 41”. d) The interior walk in area shall have a floor to ceiling height of about 76”. e) The top of the side cabinets shall be approximately 45 1/2” from the floor to the deck surface. f) There shall be 33” from the top of the deck surface to the ceiling.

Page 33 of 52



PS05032


in detail.

VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

g) The distance from the top of the compartment door frame opening to the top of the body shall be 38 1/2”.


a) The interior of the body compartments shall be coated with a grey Zolotone, splatter coating.

b) The coating shall be applied as to be durable enough to withstand everyday abuse of equipment removal and shifting.

c) All compartment floors that do not have permanently mounted equipment shall be protected with DRI - DEK flooring tiles.

d) The tiles shall be black with yellow angled leading edges.


a) Each body compartment shall be vented directly to the atmosphere in a manner that will reduce the amount of dirt and water that may enter the compartment. b) One-way rubber drain valves shall be provided in compartment floors so that a water hose may be used to flush-out compartment area.

4.5.6 Roll up Doors

a) All indicated compartment doors shall be equipped with a Robinson brand roll-up door. b) The Roll-up door shall have a satin finish, be a shutter type, with 34mm slats that roll onto a spool at the top front of the compartment. c) There shall be an aluminum drip rail with a non-abrasive seal at the top and an aluminum sill plate. d) Each slat shall be equipped with nylon end shoes to assure operation without the need of constant lubrication. e) Each track shall be equipped with replaceable side seals and a water dam style lip.


a) All high side compartments shall be furnished with a Whelen strip light, model # PSCACCR compartment light, Level 3, mounted on the backside of the compartment. b) An automatic door switch shall activate all compartment lights. c) All full height compartments shall be equipped with a Whelen strip light model # PSCACCR compartment light Level 3 mounted on the backside of the compartment. d) An automatic door switch shall activate these compartment lights. e) All compartments that have a door opening larger than 42” wide shall have a Whelen strip light model PSCACCR compartment light Level 3 mounted on the rear side of the compartment. f) There shall be lighting installed in all compartments or enclosed equipment areas with four or more cubic feet of storage.

Page 34 of 52



PS05032


in detail.

VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

g) There shall be one (1) additional compartment strip light installed under all adjustable shelves provided in the compartments. h) The lights shall be installed on the strut channels provided on the compartment wall.

4.5.8 Locking Door Handles

a) All roll-up doors shall be supplied with a keyed alike, full width handle, for ease of opening and nylon end shoes on every slat to assure operation without constant lubrication.


a) There shall be two sets of strut channels installed in four (4) compartments. b) There shall be four (4) cast aluminum shelf brackets to mount each shelf, tray or adjustable storage module. c) Shelving hardware shall be of heavy-duty quality with unlimited vertical adjustment settings.


a) There shall be four (4) fully adjustable shelves constructed of 3/16” aluminum 3003 H-14 alloy with 2” lips on all sides. b) The shelves shall be coated with thermoplastic polyurethane coating. c) The shelves shall be fabricated in such a manner that liquids readily drain when spilled. d) The floor of the shelves shall be covered with DRI-DEK flooring tiles. e) The shelves shall be installed in body compartments as directed by VF&RS.

4.5.11 Side Body Protection

a) To provide side body protection and to assist personnel in reaching equipment from exterior compartments on the left side and ahead of the rear wheels, there shall be a side rub rail below compartment door opening.

b) The rub rail shall be fabricated of satin finish aluminum, 3" high and extend from body a minimum of 1", the rub rails shall be bolted to body with flush head bolts for easy replacement if damaged.

c) To provide side body protection and to assist personnel in reaching equipment from exterior compartments on the left side and behind of the rear wheels, there shall be a side rub rail below compartment door opening.

d) The rub rail shall be fabricated of satin finish aluminum, 3" high and extend from body a minimum of 1", the rub rails shall be bolted to body with flush head bolts for easy replacement if damaged.

Page 35 of 52



PS05032


in detail.

VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

e) To provide side body protection and to assist personnel in reaching equipment from exterior compartments on the rightside and ahead of the rear wheels, there shall be a side rub rail below compartment door openings.

f) The rub rail shall be fabricated of satin finish aluminum, 3" high and extend from body a minimum of 1", the rub rails shall be bolted to body with flush head bolts for easy replacement if damaged.

g) To provide side body protection and to assist personnel in reaching equipment from exterior compartments on the rightside and rear of the rear wheels, there shall be a side rub rail below compartment door opening.

h) The rub rail shall be fabricated of satin finish aluminum, 3" high and extend from body a minimum of 1", the rub rails shall be bolted to body with flush head bolts for easy replacement if damaged.


a) There shall be a compartment located ahead of the rear wheels on the left side of the apparatus body, this compartment shall be designated as L1. b) The useable space of this compartment shall be approximately 61" wide x 23" deep to the frame rails and 30" deep above the frame. c) The approximate compartment door opening shall be 55" wide x 17" high. d) This compartment shall have a horizontally hinged box pan style doors fabricated of 1/8" aluminum. e) The door exterior shall be painted and the inner 1/8" aluminum panel shall be unpainted. f) The hinged doors shall have a stainless steel 6" Hansen offset bent D-ring locking handle with a gasket placed between stainless steel handle and door. g) Door latches shall be a two-point rotary slam, double catch latch, recessed inside the double panel door with striker plate. h) The hinged doors shall have a pneumatic cylinder to hold door in the open and closed positions.i) Each door shall be capable of being closed without unlatching, the door checks shall be bolted to the upper compartment door header and the box pan of the door. j) The floor of the compartment above the frame rails shall cover the area directly above the frame rails. k) This compartment shall be furnished and mounted with two (2) Whelen strip lights, model # PSCACCR compartment light.

4.5.13 Left Side Compartment L2.

a) There shall be a compartment located ahead of the rear wheels on the left side of the apparatus body, this compartment shall be designated as L2. b) This compartment shall have a horizontally hinged box pan style doors fabricated of 1/8" aluminum. c) The doors shall have an opening of approximately 55” wide x 17” high.

Page 36 of 52



PS05032


in detail.

VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

d) The interior shall have a usable space of approximate interior useable compartment space of 61" wide x 23" deep to the frame rails and 30" deep above the frame. e) The door's exterior shall be painted and the inner 1/8" aluminum panel shall be unpainted. f) The hinged doors shall have a stainless steel 6" Hansen offset bent D-ring locking handle with a gasket between stainless steel handle and door. g) Door latches shall be a two-point (top and bottom) rotary slam, double-catch latch, recessed inside the double panel door with striker plate. h) The hinged doors shall have a pneumatic cylinder to hold door in the open and closed positions. i) Each door shall be capable of being closed without unlatching and the door checks bolted to the upper compartment door header and the box pan of the door. j) The floor of the compartment above the frame rails shall cover the area directly above the frame rails. k) This compartment shall be furnished and mounted with two (2) Whelen strip lights, model # PSCACCR compartment light.


a) There shall be no compartment located above the rear wheels on the left side of the apparatus.b) Storage shall be from interior only.


a) There shall be a compartment located behind the rear wheels on the left side of the apparatus body, this compartment shall be designated as L4. b) This compartment shall have vertically hinged box pan style doors fabricated of 1/8" aluminum. c) The approximate compartment door opening shall be 68" wide x 30" high. d) The door exterior shall be painted and the inner 1/8" aluminum panel shall be unpainted. e) Door shall be louvered for proper generator air flow. f) There shall be approximately interior useable compartment space of 73" wide x 23" deep to the frame rails and 30" deep above the frame. g) The hinged doors shall have a stainless steel 6" Hansen offset bent D-ring locking handle with a gasket between the stainless steel handle and door. h) The door latches shall be a two-point (top and bottom) rotary slam, double-catch latch, recessed inside the double panel door with striker plate. i) The hinged doors shall have a pneumatic cylinder to hold door in the open and closed positions.

j) Each door shall be capable of being closed without unlatching and the door checks shall be bolted to the upper compartment door header and the box pan of the door.

k) The floor of the compartment above the frame rails shall cover the area directly above the frame rails.

Page 37 of 52



PS05032


in detail.

VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

l) This compartment shall be furnished and mounted with two (2) Whelen strip lights, model # PSCACCR compartment light.


a) There shall be a compartment located at the front of the body on the right side of the apparatus body, this compartment shall be designated as R1. b) This compartment shall be equipped with a Robinson brand roll-up door. c) The compartment shall have a door opening of approximately 31" wide x 59" high. d) The interior shall have a usable space of approximately 37” wide x 23” deep. e) There shall be vertically mounted Uni-Struts for shelving installation, with two (2) adjustable shelves approximately 22" deep. f) The floor of the compartment above the frame rails shall cover the area directly above the frame rails. g) This compartment shall be furnished and mounted with two (2) Whelen strip lights, model # PSCACCR compartment light.


a) There shall be a compartment located ahead of the rear wheels on the right side of the apparatus body, this compartment shall be designated as R2. b) This compartment shall be equipped with a Robinson brand roll-up door. c) The door shall have an opening of approximately 48” wide x 69” high. d) The interior shall have a usable space of approximately 52” wide x 30” deep. e) There shall be vertically mounted Uni-Struts for shelving installation with one (1) adjustable shelves approximately 29" deep. f) There shall be one (1) 200lb. slide-out tray with a SlideMaster base, approximately 46" deep and as wide as the door permits. g) There shall be one (1) 200lb. slide-out tray with a SlideMaster base, approximately 46" deep and as wide as the door permits, the trays shall be mounted to a vertically adjustable shelf. h) The floor of the compartment above the frame rails shall be extended to the interior edge of the door. i) This compartment shall be furnished and mounted with two (2) Whelen strip lights, model # PSCACCR compartment light.


a) There shall be a compartment located above of the rear wheels on the right side of the apparatus body, this compartment shall be designated as R3. b) This compartment shall be equipped with a Robinson brand roll-up door.

Page 38 of 52



PS05032


in detail.

VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

c) The door shall have an opening of approximately 52” wide x 30” high. d) The interior shall have a usable space of approximately 64” wide x 30” high. e) There shall be one (1) 200 lb. slide-out tray with a SlideMaster base, approximately 46" deep and as wide as the door permits, the trays shall be mounted to a vertically adjustable shelf. f) The floor of the compartment above the frame rails shall be extended to the interior edge of the door.

g) The floor material shall be 3/16" thick aluminum and shall have a 2" vertical lip and a 1" return to increase strength.

h) There shall be one (1) 250 lb. slide-out tray with a SlideMaster base, approximately 46" deep, each tray shall be located above the top level of the chassis frame rails.i) The floor of the compartment above the frame rails shall be extended to the interior edge of the door. j) This compartment shall be furnished and mounted with two (2) Whelen strip lights, model # PSCACCR compartment light.


a) There shall be a compartment shall be located behind therear wheels on the right side of the apparatus body, this compartment shall be designated as R4. b) This compartment shall be equipped with a Robinson brand roll-up door. c) The door shall have an opening approximately 68” wide x 54” high. d) The interior shall have a usable space of approximately 73” wide x 23” deep to the frame rails and transverse above the frame to the street side. e) There shall be vertically mounted Uni-Strut for shelving installation. f) There shall be one (1) slide-out tray with a SlideMaster base approximately 22" deep, the tray shall be located below the level of the chassis frame.

g) There shall be one (1) vertically hinged smooth aluminum tool board, there shall be eight (8) Zico walkaway type SCBA air pack brackets without CRS straps, mounted on each side of the board on Uni-Strut brackets.

h) There shall be 6 intrinsically safe rechargeable handlamps mounted in this compartment. i) The floor of the compartment above the frame rails shall be extended to the interior edge of the door. j) This compartment shall be furnished and mounted with two (2) Whelen strip lights, model # PSCACCR compartment light.

4.5.20 Side Entry Door

a) Access to the interior body compartment shall be provided through a side entry door, that is approximately 32" wide x 80" high.

Page 39 of 52



PS05032


in detail.

VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

b) The side entry door shall be with 1/8" aluminum exterior smooth plate, the interior door pan being constructed from 1/8" aluminum tread plate. c) The door shall be hung on full height 14 gauge stainless steel hinge, with a 1/4" stainless steel pin. d) The hinge shall be bolted to the door and body with stainless steel machine screws at offset 5" centres, slotted horizontally and vertically for ease of adjustment. e) A polyester barrier film gasket shall be placed between the stainless steel hinge and door. f) The latching shall be with Hansen offset bent D-ring handle on the inside and locking Hansen offset bent D-ring handle on the exterior with a polyester barrier film shall be placed between the stainless steel handles and the door panels. g) The door latch shall be a double catch two-point safety slam latch Eberhard #206 recessed inside the double panel door with strike plate mounted on the body.

4.5.21 Rear Entry Door

a) Access to the interior body compartment shall be provided through a rear entry door with a door opening of approximately 32" wide x 77" high. b) Construction of the rear entry door shall be with 1/8" aluminum exterior smooth plate, the interior door pan being constructed from 1/8" aluminum tread plate. c) The door shall be hung on full height 14 gauge stainless steel hinge, with a 1/4" stainless steel pin. d) The hinge shall be bolted to the door and body with stainless steel machine screws at offset 5" centres slotted horizontally and vertically for ease of adjustment with a polyester barrier film gasket shall be placed between the stainless steel hinge and door. e) The latching shall be with Hansen offset bent D-ring handle on the inside and locking Hansen offset bent D-ring handle on the exterior with a polyester barrier film shall be placed between the stainless steel handles and the door panels. f) The door latch shall be a double catch two-point safety slam latch Eberhard #206 recessed inside the double panel door with strike plate mounted on the body.

4.5.22 Rear entry Door Windows

a) There shall be one (1) 18" x 22" vertical sliding window installed in the upper portion of the rear entry door. b) There shall be one (1) 18" x 22" stationary window installed in the lower portion of the rear entry door. c) The windows shall have tinted automotive type safety glass mounted in an extruded aluminum frame with a black anodized finish. d) Sliding style windows shall be complete with sliding screen.

4.5.23 Side Entry Door Windows

a) There shall be one (1) 18" x 22" vertical sliding window installed in the upper portion of the side entry door.

Page 40 of 52



PS05032


in detail.

VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

b) There shall be one (1) 18" x 22" stationary window installed in the lower portion of the side entry door. c) The windows shall have tinted automotive type safety glass mounted in an extruded aluminum frame with a black anodized finish. d) Sliding style windows shall be complete with sliding screen.

4.5.24 Handrails

a) Handrails shall be 1 1/4" extruded aluminum tubing with anti-slip rubber inserts and chrome plated end stanchion.

b) The handrail shall be installed at the side entry door, the rear entry door and the inside door pan. c) The handrail shall be angled for optimum use when entering or exiting the walk-in portion of the body.

4.5.25 Body Height Measurements

a) The body shall be 98 1/2" high, not including any underbody rub rails or running boards. b) Full height compartments shall have a useable interior height of approximately 63 1/2" outside of the chassis frame rails.

c) There shall be a full floor to ceiling compartment located on the street side at the front of the main body, 24” wide x 16” deep with 5 adjustable shelves with a roll up door.

d) This cabinet would house all portable radios, detectors and other equipment requiring to be plug in and the electrical outlet. e) There will need to be electrical power bars for a minimum of 8 portable radios, 4 Draeger “Mini Warn” detectors and 3 bump test cylinder kits.f) Over the wheel well compartments shall have an approximate useable interior height of 41". g) The interior walk in area shall have a floor to ceiling height of approximately 76". h) The top of the side cabinets shall be approximately 45 1/2" from the floor to the deck surface. There shall be 33" from the top of the deck surface to the ceiling. i) The distance from the top of the compartment door frame opening to the top of the body shall be 38 1/2".

4.5.26 Interior Insulation

a) Following the sheet metal fabrication of the roof area, upper exterior walls and the entry door of the apparatus body shall be insulated with 1 1/2" rigid polyurethane foam insulation. b) The insulation shall be a type that will not absorb moisture, move once in place or deteriorate. c) Mat type fibreglass or spray in foam insulation is not acceptable.

4.5.27 Interior Finish

Page 41 of 52



PS05032


in detail.

VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

a) The interior of the apparatus body shall have a fully maintenance free and durable finish. b) The interior finish shall be installed on the ceiling, front wall, and interior side walls from top of exterior compartments to ceiling height. c) The interior panels shall be installed with sheet metal screws with white plastic plugs covering screws and bright aluminum, stainless steel or oak corner mouldings. d) The interior finish shall be bright white pebble grain.

4.5.28 Interior Floor

a) Above the body subframe shall be an isolation sheet of 16 gauge stainless steel. b) The sheet shall be flanged on both sides with a 1" high vertical break, to hold a full length sound and thermal barrier of 1" thick air core plastic. c) The tread plate walkway floor shall be 3/16" aluminum installed above the barrier, with a 1" high vertical break on each side of the floor panel to form a watertight splash and kickboard along the walkway sides. d) The walkway floor area shall be continuously welded at all cross seams to provide a watertight finish, so that a water hose may be used to flush-out walkway area. e) The flooring shall be bolted to body sub-frame with countersunk stainless steel bolts.

4.5.29 Electric Step

a) There shall be one (1) set of heavy duty, 12 volt, electric folding steps furnished and installed under the apparatus.

b) The steps shall be located under the side entry door. c) Each step shall be 24" wide and shall fold up under the body to improve ground clearance during travel. d) Upon activation, the step shall drop out and down using electric actuators. e) The distance from the ground to the first step shall be no more than 24" per in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 1901 - 2003 edition. f) The top surface of each step shall be covered with an NFPA 1901 non-skid compliant aluminum tread plate.

4.5.30 Interior Deck Material

a) The interior deck areas, over the top of the exterior side compartments shall be smooth aluminum. b) The deck areas shall be trimmed with aluminum edge mouldings.

4.5.31 Sliding Pocket Door

a) There shall be one (1) sliding pocket door provided in the apparatus body interior.

b) Each pocket door shall be approximately 1-1/2" thick and shall be equipped with a pneumatic cylinder, which will "over-centre" to hold the door in open and closed positions.

Page 42 of 52



PS05032


in detail.

VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

4.5.32 Compartment Threshold Protection

a) Compartment threshold protection plates shall be fabricated from brushed stainless steel. b) The protection plates shall be installed on the lower door opening sills of each exterior compartment.

4.5.33 Walk in Interior Lights

a) There shall be seven (7) Truck-Lite #80355 7" diameter interior dome lights with clear lens provided with a switch at the entry door for body 12 volt interior lighting.

4.5.34 Outlet Strip

a) There shall be two (2) 120 volt outlet strips approximately 3' long with straight blade household type outlets provided on the interior of apparatus body. b) A 15 ampere circuit breaker protection shall be provided for each strip. c) The VF&RS shall specify the exact location prior to construction.

4.5.35 Interior Body 120 Volt Lighting

a) There shall be six (6) 120 volt lights installed in the walk-in area of the body. b) The lights shall be single bulb, 22 watt fluorescent lights with fully enclosed protective lens covers, and flush aluminum trim. c) Each light shall be recessed down the centre of the walkway. d) The light switch shall be at the entry doorway area. e) The interior lights shall be wired to the generator system with a 15 amp circuit breaker protection.

4.5.36 SCBA Walk- Away Air Pack Brackets

a) SCBA air pack walk-away type brackets located as indicated in the numbered compartment list. b) The walk-away bracket shall have high cycle retention clips specifically sized for the brand and model of air cylinder to be stored. c) There shall also be a positive type restraint strap to secure the bottle into the walk-away bracket.d) There shall be rubber matting installed inside each storage tube for bottle protection.

4.5.37 Slide Out Equipment Trays

a) The heavy duty slide-out equipment trays shall be fabricated from 3/16" (.188) aluminum 3003H-14 alloy smooth plate. b) The trays shall be built with a 3" high vertical lip, with welded corners, to form a box type tray surface. c) The tray shall be mounted on a two (2) rail heavy duty structural steel frame with twelve (12) sealed 200lb. static load ball bearings.

Page 43 of 52



PS05032


in detail.

VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

d) The slide-out tray shall be rated for a maximum 200lb. load. e) The tray shall be locked in its stored position as well as at 50% and 100% of extension for loading or as a stationary work surface.

4.5.38 Heavy Duty Slide Out Equipment Trays

a) The heavy duty slide-out equipment trays shall be fabricated from 3/16" (.188) aluminum 3003 H-14 alloy smooth plate. b) The trays shall be built with a 4" high vertical lip, with welded corners, to form a box type tray surface. c) The tray shall be mounted on a three (3) rail heavy duty structural steel frame with twelve (12) sealed 1000lb. static load ball bearings. d) The slide-out tray shall be rated for a maximum 1000lb. load. e) The tray shall be locked in its stored position as well as at 50% and 100% of extension for loading or as a stationary work surface.

4.5.39 Slide-Out Tilt Down Equipment Trays

a) The Trays shall be fabricated of 3/16" (.188) aluminum 3003 H-14 alloy smooth plate. b) The trays shall be built with a 3" high vertical lip, with welded corners, to form a box type tray surface. c) The tray shall be mounted on a two (2) rail heavy duty structural steel frame with twelve (12) sealed 250lb. static load ball bearings. d) The slide-out tray shall be rated for a maximum 250lb. load. e) The tray shall be locked in its stored position as well as at 50% and 100% of extension for loading or as a stationary work surface.


a) The fenders shall be integral with the body sides and compartments with a seamless appearance. b) The fenders shall be fitted with bolt in removable full circular inner-liners in the wheel well area for ease of cleaning and maintenance. c) There shall be sufficient clearance provided in the wheel wells to allow the use of tire chains when the apparatus fully loaded.


a) Two (2) aluminum fenderettes shall be installed at the outboard edge of the rear wheel well area, one on each side.

b) The fenderettes shall be bolted to the apparatus body using nylon washers to space them slightly away from the body. c) The fenderettes shall be constructed of aluminum that has been polished to a high quality finish.

Page 44 of 52



PS05032


in detail.

VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

4.5.42 Mudflaps

a) Four (4) mudflaps shall be installed on the apparatus, twoat the front and two at the rear. b) The mudflaps shall be a minimum of ½” thick to prevent “sailing”.

4.5.43 10” Rear Bumper

a) There shall be a full width rear bumper constructed from minimum 2" x 6" x 1/4" aluminum tubing and covered with 3/16" aluminum tread plate. b) The bumper shall extend from the rear vertical body panel 10" and provide a rear step with a 1" space at body for water drainage. c) The stepping surface shall have a grip surface insert to meet NFPA requirements. d) Bumper shall be an extension of the body subframe for strength.

4.5.44 Roll Out Awning – Curb Side

a) A heavy-duty canopy awning shall be installed on the Curb side of the apparatus body. b) The awning shall be full length of the body long with approximately 8’ of extension length. c) The awning shall be manufactured with satin finish extruded aluminum arms and braces. d) The arm channels shall utilize nylon bearings for a smooth operation. e) The awning shall lock while in stored position to prevent any rattling during travel. f) The awning will lock and unlock with a remote brake control located on awning arm, not requiring the use of a wand. g) Features of the awning are:

i. Built-in Thin-Lite 12 volt amber fluorescent light. ii. Awning hangers. iii. Built-in awning tie downs to hold awning steady in a breeze.

iv. Multi-layer, laminated vinyl fabric that resists scratches, stains, fading, mildew and # 8604 natural in colour.

4.5.45 Fuel Fill



a) There shall be two (2) chrome plated tow eyes at the installed at the rear of the apparatus, below the rear step area.

b) The tow eyes shall be bolted to a heavy duty assembly that is welded to the rear frame area.

Page 45 of 52



PS05032


in detail.

VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

c) Each tow eye shall have a 2 ½” ID hole.

4.5.47 Wheel Chocks

a) Two (2) wheel chocks shall be provided with the apparatus that meet SAE # J-348 requirements. b) They shall be mounted in aluminum brackets at a place decided at the pre construction meeting.

4.5.48 Weather Station

a) Capricorn 2000 Weather station or VF&RS approved equal shall be supplied and installed in a compartment.

4.6 Slide Out Work Area

4.6.1 Slide Out system

a) There shall be one (1) "slide-out" section which shall extend approximately 35" as measured from the outside of the body. b) The extendable module shall be 10' in length and the interior height shall be approximately 9" less that the interior height of the body walkway. c) The installed module shall provide water tight seal in both the fully extended and the retracted positions. d) The slide-out section shall utilize smooth operating, quiet "Power Gear" - gear and rack system. e) The system shall use heavy duty, positive 100% synchronized gear and rack system to prevent binding during the extend or retract cycle.

f) The rack system shall be rated for up to 1,500 pounds.

g) A three (3) position, momentary type rocker switch shall be used to operate the slide out wall system. h) In the event of a system failure, a manual override shall be provided. i) The slide-out section shall be framed with 2" x 2" x 1/4" 6061-T6 alloy aluminum. j) The framing structure shall be covered with 1/8" thick 3003-H14 smooth aluminum. k) There shall be two (2) flashing LED warning lights with red lenses, one at each end of the slide-out section that activate and be visible when the unit is extended. l) All electrical wiring installed in the slide out wall shall run through a boxed type conduit at the lower corner of the system. m) All wiring shall be enclosed in a flexible, moisture resistant, reinforced conduit, with proper seal tight connectors and hardware. n) Access shall be provided for inspection of all wiring and the gear and rack mechanism.

o) RV type slide-outs or slide-outs using light weight metal or fibreglass shall not be acceptable, NO EXCEPTIONS.

4.6.2 Windows

Page 46 of 52



PS05032


in detail.

VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

a) One (1) 18" wide x 22" high vertical sliding window shall be installed in the forward facing wall of the slide-out module.

b) One (1) 18" wide x 22" high vertical sliding window shall be installed in the rearward facing wall of the slide-out module.

c) There shall be two (2) 42" x 22" horizontal sliding window shall be installed in the slide-out module to allow natural light to enter the walk-in area when the slide-out is either extended or retracted. d) The windows shall have tinted automotive type safety glass mounted in an extruded aluminum frame that have a black anodized finish. e) The windows shall be complete with sliding mesh screens.

4.6.3 Interior Cabinet – Full Height

a) There shall be two (2) interior full height cabinets furnished and installed. b) Each cabinet shall be constructed of 1/8" smooth aluminum, approximately 60" wide x 92" deep x 72" high. c) The exposed surfaces of each cabinet shall have a Hammertone gray powder coat finish. d) The above cabinets shall have a Robinson roll-up compartment doors with three (3) vertically adjustable shelves in each of the above cabinets.

4.6.4 Interior Desk

a) The interior of apparatus shall be provided with a desktop approximately 36" - 72" wide. b) The desk shall be 24" deep and located approximately 30" from floor to desktop. c) The front edge of desktop shall be reinforced with 2" x 2" tubing to support a person sitting on edge of desk. d) The desk top surface shall be fabricated of 1/8" smooth finish aluminum with a 2" vertical back splash along back edge and a 2" vertical downward edge along front to cover the 2" x 2" reinforcement. e) 2-1/2" diameter holes with plastic edge grommet shall be provided at each rear corner for wiring of future equipment to be located on desktop. f) The desktop shall be painted grey or black with a hammer tone powder coat. g) The Location of desk to be determined at the pre-construction meeting.

4.6.5 Interior Pedestal Seats

a) The apparatus body interior shall be provided with two (2)pedestal type seats. b) Each seat shall be a Bostrom Sierra high back vinyl seat with 6" fore/aft adjustment.

c) Each seat shall be mounted on a swivel style pedestal.

4.7 Generator

Page 47 of 52



PS05032


in detail.

VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

4.7.1 Generator - Diesel

a) One (1) Koehler 20,000 Watt maximum power rating, 20,000 watt continuous power rating, 120/240 Volt, 12/8.3 amp, 60 Hertz, electrical generator with electric start shall be provided.

b) The generator shall be equipped with low oil shutdown.

c) Generator starting system shall be wired to chassis battery system with heavy-duty stranded copper cables. d) The fuel system shall be modified with addition of an electric fuel pump and plumbed to chassis fuel system.

4.7.2 Generator Mounting

a) The generator shall be mounted on rubber vibration isolators. b) The compartment shall be reinforced where necessary to hold weight of generator. c) Generator shall be installed over a stainless steel drip pan with a 1" lip to retain any spillage of oil or fuel. d) A valve shall be located at generator oil drain outlet and shall be piped to underside of generator compartment with flexible hose and plug. e) The drain shall be located where easily accessible for generator service.

4.7.3 Fuel System

a) The generator fuel system shall be plumbed to the chassis main fuel tank with a separate fuel line that is properly protected and secured inside of chassis frame installed directly from the tank, not connected to the truck engine fuel line system. b) A shut-off valve shall be provided between the generator and fuel line as it enters the compartment. c) The fuel lines shall be wire-braided hose.


a) The generator starting system shall be powered by chassis battery system with heavy duty, 00 series stranded copper cables. b) The starter line shall by-pass the chassis master switch to permit generator operation when the apparatus engine is not running. c) This starter line shall be of sufficient size for the generator, adequately protected and supported inside the chassis frame area.

4.7.5 Safety Shutdowns

a) The generator shall be equipped with the following safety functions for protection of the generator unit.

i. High Temperature Shutdown. ii. Low Oil Pressure Shutdown


Page 48 of 52



PS05032


in detail.

VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

a) The installation of the cooling system shall permit operation of the unit, both while the apparatus is stationary and while it is in motion. b) The incoming airflow shall be though stamped louvers in compartment walls and or doors, or though a hooded vent opening in the compartment roof. c) The louvers or hooded opening shall provide adequate airflow for operation of the generator in stationary or moving position.

4.7.7 Exhaust System

a) The generators exhaust system shall be equipped with a residential type muffler for maximum quieting, and black iron rigid pipe to link the generator to the muffler.

4.7.8 Generator Compartment Insulation

a) The generator compartment shall be provided with heavy duty sound insulation applied to walls and ceiling. b) The Insulation shall have a high temperature rating with a foil facing and attached to walls with positive type fasteners, glue type adhesive will not be acceptable.

4.7.9 Generator Instrumentation

a) To properly monitor the generator’s performance and load demand during operation, a metering panel shall be provided on the apparatus.

b) This panel shall be located near the circuit breaker panel.

c) The installation shall be equipped with the following instruments: i. Voltmeter. ii. Ammeter per line. iii. Hourmeter . iv. Frequency meter

4.7.10 Generator Controls

a) Generator controls shall be provided at the generator and on the rear cab workstation 12-volt control panel.

b) The following controls shall be provided at each station:

i. One (1) pre-heat switch. ii. One (1) start/stop switch. iii. One (1) generator running indicator light.

4.7.11 Generator Grounding

a) The generator system shall be provided with a Hannay spring rewind-grounding reel with 20' of stranded copper ground cable and heavy duty welding clamp.

b) The exhaust pipe shall be securely supported and shall be shielded or insulated to prevent excessive heating of the

Page 49 of 52



PS05032


in detail.

VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

b) One (1) end to be permanently attached to apparatus frame, forming a low resistance ground to the generator and all 120-volt circuits. c) The ground rod shall be 3' long with an integrated weight hammer to drive the rod into the ground. d) The ground rod shall be stored in a rear compartment.

4.8 Paint Process

4.8.1 Main Body Paint Process

a) The cab shall be painted two tone with the break line 1 ½” below the cab side windows and down to the top of the grill on the cab front fascia. b) After the body and components have been fabricated andassembled they shall then be disassembled prior to painting so when the apparatus is completed there shall be finish paint beneath the removable components. c) The apparatus body and components shall be metal finished to provide a superior substrate for painting. d) All aluminum sections of the body shall undergo a thorough cleaning process followed by a complete rinse and a chemical conversion coating shall be applied to seal the metal substrate. e) The body and its components shall be primed with an epoxy primer and the seams shall be caulked.

f) All bright metal fittings, if not available in stainless steel or polished aluminum, shall be heavily chrome plated.

g) Iron fittings shall be copper under-plated prior to chrome plating. h) The body shall go through a three (3) stage paint process, following the standards as set forth by PPG Fleet Finish Guidelines.

i. Primer coat. ii. Base coat. iii. Clear coat.

i) A minimum of two (2) to three (3) coats of paint shall be applied to achieve hiding. j) In the final stage of the paint process the body shall be painted with a minimum of two (2) to three (3) coats of PPG DCU-2002 Clear Coat, to achieve a total dry film thickness of 2-3 mills. k) The painted body shall go through a baking process to achieve a complete coating cure on the finished product. l) The coated surface shall be sanded using 1000, 1200, and or 1500 grit sandpaper to remove surface defects. m) The surface shall be buffed with 3m Super-duty compounds to add extra shine to coated surface; no more than .5 mil of clear coat shall be removed in this process.

4.8.2 Apparatus Body Paint Colours

a) The apparatus shall be painted with PPG polyurethane enamel paint. b) The colour shall be RED PPG# DBHS – 71096-ALT.

Page 50 of 52



PS05032


in detail.

VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

c) One (1) four ounce bottle of acrylic enamel touch-up paint shall be supplied.


a) A white reflective striping shall be applied to the exterior of the apparatus in a manner consistent with NFPA 1901 – 2003 or latest edition. b) The stripes shall conform to ASTM 4965, Standard Specifications for Retroreflective Sheeting for Traffic Control, Type III, Class 1 or Class 3. c) The length of stripe shall be 50% of the cab and body length of each side, 50% of the rear of the body, and 25% of the front width of apparatus. d) The reflective striping shall be 3M Scotchlite Diamond Grade and white in colour. e) It shall consist of a 1”, 6”, and a 1” wide stripe low across the front of the chassis and along the sides up to the first compartment on each side. f) It shall then angle up and back to a point above the wheel well area where it shall then run level to the back edge of the body. g) There shall be a 1” gap provided between each of the stripes. h) One (1) 6” wide stripe and two (2) 1” stripes shall be applied across the rear of the apparatus


a) There shall be eighteen (18) gold reflective letters provided and installed on the front cab doors, the letters shall be approximately 4” tall with black outline and shadow, that read VANCOUVER and over a 14” VF&RS decal, that will be supplied by VF&RS.b) There shall be fourteen (14) gold reflective letters provided and installed on the on rear cab doors, the letters shall be approximately 4” tall with black outline and shadow that read Hazardous Material X, X will be determined later in production. c) There shall be eighteen (18) white reflective, provided and installed on the centre of the front bumper, the letters shall be approximately 6” tall with black outline and shadow that read Hazardous Material X

d) There shall be eight (8) white reflective letters painted on to an aluminum plates that are installed on to the left and right side of the cab roof, the letters shall be approximately 6” tall with black outline and shadow that read H M X

e) There shall be thirty six (36) gold reflective letters provided and installed below the rear doors, the letters shall be approximately 4” tall with black outline and shadow that read “Keep Back 150 metres” and Hazardous Material X, in 4” white reflective lettering on black shading.

4.8.5 Undercoating


Page 51 of 52



PS05032


in detail.

VFRS onlyYES

VFRS onlyNO

b) The first step shall be a rubberized polyurethane base compound, applied after the body has been primed. c) The materials used shall incorporate unused paint products to reduce the amount of waste released into the environment. d) This coat shall be applied to all hidden pockets and surfaces that shall not be visible after completion. e) The entire underside of the body shall be coated with a bituminous-based automotive type undercoating when the apparatus is completed. f) Care shall be taken to avoid spraying the product on airlines, cables, or other items that would cause normal maintenance to be hindered

Page 52 of 52

Date post:	05-Mar-2023
Category:	Documents
Upload:	khangminh22
View:	0 times
Download:	0 times

Schedule A1 - City of Vancouver

Documents